接力版三年级英语全英教案模板（精选多篇）

发布时间：2020-04-18 14:18:25 来源：教案模板收藏本文下载本文手机版

推荐第1篇：新版小学三年级下册英语全英教案

, 教学内容 teaching content , 教学目标Teaching goal ,教学重点及难Teaching key and difficulty, 教具Teaching aid ,教学方法Teaching method,

教学过程teaching procedure热身/复习（Warm-up/Revision）

新课呈现 presentation 练习/操练

practice 巩固 consolidation总结 Sum up/ Summary

课堂评价（Aement）课型(听说课)cla(Hears the cla) 对话 dialogue

自由谈话 free talk

阅读 reading 复述 retelling

背诵 reciting 默写 writing from memory

做练习do exercises

教学内容：Unit one WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL（1）

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the names.

2、Learn to say “I am from America/Canada/China.”

3、Learn to introduce yourself.教学重点：Learn to say “I am from America/Canada/China.” 教学难点：Learn to introduce yourself.

教学用具：word cards/pictures。

教学过程： Step1:

1、Look at the picture: WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL

2、Say out the English in the pictures Step2: Learn the names.

1、Look at the people.

2、Learn the names:Amy

3、Look and say.

Step3: Learn to say : WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL I am from America/Canada/China.Step4: Introduce yourself

Step5: Summary

Step6: homework 板书设计：

Unit 1 WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL

I am from America/Canada/China.

作业布置：

1、Revise the names ；

2、Say “I am from America/Canada/China.” 教学后记：

学生对英语的学习兴趣很浓。

教学内容：Unit one Hello!（2）

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn Part A(Let‟s talk Let‟s learn).

2、Learn the new words 教学重点：Let‟s talk Let‟s learn

教学难点：The new words and sentences. 教学用具：Tape/word cards/pictures。

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Revise the names.

2、I am from America/Canada/China.Step2: Learn the sentences of Part A

1、Look at the pictures.

2、Listen to the recording

3、Look at the sentences and read them after the recording

4、Read the sentences together

5、Try to say “watch out” to someone..Step3: Let‟s play

Step4: Learn the new words of Part A

1、Learn the new words.

2、Play a game

Listen and do .

.Step5: Summary Step6: homework 板书设计：

Unit 1 WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL

Watch out! boy or girl! 作业布置：

1、Read the sentences；

2、Read the words

3、Listen to the tape.教学后记：

对新单词学的较快，并能较快理解新句子。

教学内容：Unit one Unit 1 WELCOME BACK TO SCHOOL

教学目标和要求：

1、Revision

2、Try to learn the letters: A /B/C.

3、Learn to sing the song :boys and girls 教学重点：Let‟s make and Let‟s sing 教学难点：Write the name.

教学用具：Tape/word cards/pictures/recorder。

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Revise the words

2、Let‟s do.

Step2: Let‟s say the letters.

1、Learn to say the letters.Aa/Bb/Bc 2\Try to write the letters.Aa/Bb/Bc Step3: Learn to sing

1、Learn to read the words of the song .

2、Listen to the recording

3、Try to sing after recorder

4、Sing the song together

Step4:Summary

Step6:homework 板书设计：

Unit 1 welcome back to school

Apple ant /boy bag /coke coffee

3）3

（

作业布置：

1、Listen to the recorder

2、Try to sing the song

教学后记：

对对话的理解较好。

教学内容：Unit one welcome back to school（4）

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Try to do :Show me…

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：eraser和crayon的发音

教学用具：Tape/word cards/pictures/recorder。

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new words

1、The teacher show out sth.

2、The students say the words after the teacher

3、Look and say

4、Play a game :Gueing game

5、Step3: Let‟s do

6、Listen to the tape and show out the things

Step4: Summary

Step6: homework

板书设计：

Unit 1 welcome back to school

Where are you from? I‟m from America.

作业布置：

3、Listen to the recorder

4、Read the words 教学后记：学生对本课掌握得较好，乐于用本文学的句型造句。

教学内容：Unit one welcome back to school!（5）教学目标和要求：

1、Revise the words

2、Learn the sentences of Part B.

3、Try to ask someone: Where are you from? 教学重点：The new sentences 教学难点：Ask your name 教学用具：Tape/word cards/pictures/recorder。教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Say out the words

2、Read the words

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at the pictures of Part B

2、Listen to the recorder

3、Ask and answer

4、Read the sentences

5、Pair work

6、Let‟s talk.

Step3: Let‟s play

1、Wear the name cards.

2、Make dialogue.Step4: Summary

Step6: homework

板书设计：

Unit 1 welcome back to school I‟m sorry.It‟s OK.Come in!

作业布置：

1、Listen to the recorder

2、Read the sentences 教学后记：学生对话较好，能正确理解对话。教学内容：Unit one welcome back to school（6）教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Let‟s do

3、Let‟s chant.

教学重点：The new words 教学难点：Ee 的发音

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things 教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Look and say:

2、Ask and answer

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at the pictures

2、Learn the new words

3、Look and say

4、Listen to the tape and read the words after the recording

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Listen to the tape

2、Look at the pictures

3、Listen and do Step4: Let‟s chant

1、Listen to the tape

2、Learn to say “D/E”

3、Listen and do

Step5: Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 1 welcome back to school I‟m sorry.It‟s OK.Come in! 作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words and sentences 教学后记：

学生理解较好。

教学内容：Unit one welcome back to school（7）

教学目标和要求：

1、Try to understand Part C: story time

2、To know the culture: Teachers‟ Day and learn the song

3、Let‟s check

教学重点：Let‟s check.The song

教学难点：Story time

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、The words

2、The sentences

Step2:Finish „Let‟s check”

1、Listen and chose the right answer.

2、Check your answers.

Step3: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Try to understand the story

3、Listen to the tape

4、Say after the tape

Step4: Culture

1、When is the „women‟s Day?

2、Happy „Teacher‟s Day!”

Step5: Let‟s sing: Happy „Teacher‟s Day!

1、Read the song

2、Listen to the tape

3、Sing together

Step6:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 1 welcome back to school

Happy women‟s Day! Thank you!

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Sing the song.

教学后记：

学生的练习反馈情况较上一节课好。

教学内容：Unit Two My family(1)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s talk Part A

2、Let‟s play Part B

教学重点：The sentences of Part A

教学难点：Who‟s that …?Who‟s this…?

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Say Hello/Hi

2、Revise the names.

Step2:Learn the sentences

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the sentences after the recording

4、Read the sentences together

5、Group work

6、Performances

Step3: Let‟s play

1、Try to introduce someone

3、Step4: Listen and do

Step5: Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 2 My family

Father mother man woman

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences 教学后记：

学生对单词学习较有兴趣，学得较快。

教学内容：Unit Two My family (2)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Try to listen and touch

3、教学重点：the new words

教学难点：Let‟s do

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Greetings

2、Introduce someone

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at new pectures.

2、Learn the new words

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the new words

5、Gueing game

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the picture

2、Listen and do

Step4: Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 2 My family

Who‟s this man?He‟s my father.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words 教学后记：

学生对练习完成得较好。

教学内容：Unit Two Look at me(3)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s draw

2、Sing the song

3、Learn Part B: Let‟s talk

教学重点：Let‟s talk and Let‟s sing

教学难点：afternoon 的发音

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Touch you r…

2、Good morning/Nice to meet you!

Step2: Learn the sentences of Part B

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the aentences

4、Read the sentences

5、Pefor the dialogue

Step3: Let‟s playr

1、Look at the pictures

2、Read the sentences

3、Play the game with your partner.Step4:Sing the Teddy bear song

1、Read the words

2、Listen to the tape

3、Sing the song

4、Sing and do

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 2 My family Who‟s this boy? He‟s my brother.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences

3、Sing the song 教学后记：

学生对句子学习较好。

教学内容：Unit Two My family (4) 教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Let‟s do and chant

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Greetings

2、Let‟s do

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at the toy

2、Say out the words

3、Look and say

4、Listen to the recording

5、Listen and do

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Let‟s do

Step4:Let‟s chant

1、Listen to the tape

2、Say and do

Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 2 My family Come on.Who‟s this boy? He‟s my brother.作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words

教学后记：

对比较级的练习反馈较理想。

教学内容：Unit Two My family(5)

教学目标和要求：

1、Try to understand the meaning of the story tome

2、Try to know the culture.

3、Let‟s check

教学重点：Story tome; Culture;Let‟s check

教学难点：Let‟s check

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the recording

3、Read the sentences after the recording

4、Try to understand the meaning of story

5、Read the story

Step3: To know culture

1、Look at the pictures

2、The culture of Halloween

Step4:Let‟s sing

1、Listen to the recording

2、Read the words of the song

3、Sing the song after the recording

4、Sing the song together

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 2 My family How beautiful.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Sing the song 教学后记：

学生练习反馈较好。

教学内容：Unit 3 How many (1)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the sentences of Part A

2、Try to ask someone “How many ?”

教学重点：The new sentences

教学难点：The new sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new sentences

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the sentences after the tape

4、Read the sentences

5、Learn the new sentences

Step3: Let‟s play

1、Look at the sentences

2、Read the sentences

5、Step4:Do the exercises

Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

How many kites can you see? I can see 12.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences 教学后记：

四会词句基本上掌握。

教学内容：Unit 3 How many? (2)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s learn the numbers

2、Try to listen and do

3、Say out the numbers

教学重点：The numbers

教学难点：Say out the numbers

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision Ask and answer

Step2: Learn the numbers

1、Look at the pictures

2、Find out the numbers

3、Say out the numbers

4、Listen to the tape

5、Read the words after the recording

6、Read and say the numbers

7、Look and say

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Look at the numbers

3、Listen to the tape

4、Listen and do

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

How many cats can you see? I can see 10.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the numbers 教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 3 How many (3)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the song

2、Learn the sentences of Part B

3、

教学重点：The sentences

教学难点：The sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Say out the numbers

2、Let‟s paint

Step2: Let‟s sing

1、Try to understand the meaning of the song

2、Listen to the recording

3、Sing after the tape

Step3: Let‟s talk

1、Ask and answer

2、Listen to the recording

3、Try to understand the dialogue

4、Read the dialogue

5、Act the dialogue out

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

Eleven twelve thirteen ………

作业布置：

1、Listen to the recorder

2、Read the sentences

3、Draw a picture.

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 3 How many (4)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the sentences

2、Learn the numbers

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new words of numbers

1、Look at the numbers

2、Learn the new numbers

3、Listen to the recording

4、Read the words

5、Say out the numbers Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen and do

Step4:Exercises

1、活动手册

2、Look and say

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

Jeep jump key kangaroo

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words.教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 3 How many (5)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s check

2、Let‟s chant

3、Story time 教学重点：Let‟s check/ Let‟s chant/ Story time 教学难点：Let‟s check

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures

教学过程：

Step1: Let‟s check

1、Listen to the tape

2、Finish the exercises

3、Check the answers

Step2: Let‟s chant

1、Look at the pictures

2、Find out the numbers

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the sentences after the recording

5、Read the sentences together

Step3: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the recorder

3、Try to understand the meaning of the story

4、Read the sentences after the recording

5、Read the sentences

Step4:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

How many crayons do you have?

Gue!!! 作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 3 How many (6)

教学目标和要求：

1、To know the culture

2、Learn the song

3、Finish the exercises

教学重点：The exercises 教学难点：The exercises

教学用具：Tape/recorder

教学过程：

Step1: To kown the culture

1、Look at the flags

2、Say out the numbers of the flags

Step2: Let‟s sing

1、Look at the words of the songs

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the words

4、Sing the song

Step3: Finish the exercises

1、Listening work

2、活动手册

Step4:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 3 How many

Lion milk mouse nest

作业布置：

3、Listen to the tape

4、Finish the sentences

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Recycle(1)

教学目标和要求：

1、Try t understand the story

2、Try to cat the story

教学重点：Let‟s act

教学难点：Let‟s act

教学用具：Tape/recorder

教学过程： Step1: Revision

1、Sing a song

2、Greeting ?

Step2: Let‟s act

1、Look at the pictures

2、Try to understand the story

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the dialogue after the tape

5、Try to understand the sentences

6、Read the story together

7、Act the story

Step3:A match

1、Group work Act the story out

2、Retell the story Step4:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Let‟s share!!

Good idea!! Thanks!!!

作业布置：

1.Listen to the tape 2.Read the sentences

教学后记：

学生练习较好。

教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears?(1)

教学目标和要求：

3、Learn the sentences of Part A

4、Try to ask someone “Do you like pears?.”

教学重点：The new sentences

教学难点：The new sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new sentences

6、Look at the pictures

7、Listen to the tape

8、Read the sentences after the tape

9、Read the sentences

10、Learn the new sentences

Step3: Let‟s play

3、Look at the sentences

4、Read the sentences

6、Step4:Do the exercises

Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears? (1) Do you like peaches? Yes, I do.作业布置：

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the sentences 教学后记：

四会词句基本上掌握。

教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears? (2)

教学目标和要求：

4、Let‟s learn new sentences

5、Try to listen and do

6、Say out the animals

教学重点：THE FRUITES

教学难点：Say out the animals

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision Ask and answer

Step2: Learn the fuites

8、Look at the pictures

9、Find out the fuites

10、Say out the animals

11、Listen to the tape

12、Read the words after the recording

13、Read and say the fuites

14、Look and say

Step3: Let‟s do

5、Look at the pictures

6、Look at the fruits

7、Listen to the tape

8、Listen and do

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears?

Do you like peaches? Yes, I do./No,I don‟t.

作业布置：

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the fruits

5、教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容： Unit 4 Do you like pears? (3)

教学目标和要求：

4、Learn the song

5、Learn the sentences of Part B

6、

教学重点：The sentences

教学难点：The sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

3、Say out the fruits

4、Let‟s paint

Step2: Let‟s sing

4、Try to understand the meaning of the song

5、Listen to the recording

6、Sing after the tape

Step3: Let‟s talk

6、Ask and answer

7、Listen to the recording

8、Try to understand the dialogue

9、Read the dialogue

10、Act the dialogue out

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears?

Have some fruits.Have some more?

作业布置：

4、Listen to the recorder

5、Read the sentences

6、Draw a picture.

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears? (4)

教学目标和要求：

3、Learn the sentences

4、Learn the animals

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new words of fruits

6、Look at the fruits

7、Learn the new fruits

8、Listen to the recording

9、Read the words

10、Say out the fruits

11、Step3: Let‟s do

3、Look at the pictures

4、Listen and do

Step4:Exercises

3、活动手册

4、Look and say

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears?

An apple a day!

作业布置：

5、Listen to the tape

6、Read the words.教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears (5)

教学目标和要求：

4、Let‟s check

5、Let‟s chant

6、Story time 教学重点：Let‟s check/ Let‟s chant/ Story time 教学难点：Let‟s check

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures

教学过程：

Step1: Let‟s check

4、Listen to the tape

5、Finish the exercises

6、Check the answers

Step2: Let‟s chant

5、Look at the pictures

6、Find out the fruits

7、Listen to the tape

8、Read the sentences after the recording

5、Read the sentences together

Step3: Story time

6、Look at the pictures

7、Listen to the recorder

8、Try to understand the meaning of the story

9、Read the sentences after the recording

10、Read the sentences

Step4: Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears?

Rainbow rain snake squirrel tiger taxi

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences 教学后记：学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears? (6)

教学目标和要求：

4、To know the culture

5、Learn the song

6、Finish the exercises

教学重点：The exercises 教学难点：The exercises

教学用具：Tape/recorder

教学过程：

Step1: To know the culture

3、Look at the flags

4、Say out the animals of the flags

Step2: Let‟s sing

5、Look at the words of the songs

6、Listen to the tape

7、Read the words

8、Sing the song

Step3: Finish the exercises

3、Listening work

4、活动手册

Step4:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Do you like pears?

Apple bananas strawberry grapes

作业布置：

7、Listen to the tape

8、Finish the sentences 教学后记：学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.教学内容：Unit 4 Do you like pears（7）教学目标和要求：

4、Try to understand Part C: story time

5、To know the culture: Teachers‟ Day and learn the song

6、Let‟s check

教学重点：Let‟s check.The song

教学难点：Story time

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

3、The words

4、The sentences

Step2:Finish „Let‟s check”

3、Listen and chose the right answer.

4、Check your answers.Step3: Story time

5、Look at the pictures

6、Try to understand the story

7、Listen to the tape

8、Say after the tape Step4: Culture Step5: Let‟s sing: Read the song

4、Listen to the tape

5、Sing together Step6:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 4 Unit 4 Do you like pears?

I want some chicken.Doggy bag,please! 作业布置：

3、Listen to the tape

4、Sing the song.教学后记：学生的练习反馈情况较好。

教学内容：Unit 5 Where is my ruler?(1)

教学目标和要求：

3、Let‟s talk Part A

4、Let‟s play Part B

教学重点：The sentences of Part A

教学难点：方位的正确表达

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Say out the animals.

2、Revise the sentences.

Step2:Learn the sentences

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the sentences after the recording

4、Read the sentences together

5、Group work

6、Performances

Step3: Let‟s play

Try to say out in on under ……

Step4: Listen and do

Step5: Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 5 Where is my ruler? Where is my car? In on under…..作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences 教学后记：学生对单词学习较有兴趣，学得较快。教学内容：Unit 5 Where is my ruler? (2)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Try to listen and act.

教学重点：the new words

教学难点：Let‟s do

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Greetings

2、Sing a song.

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at new cards.

2、Learn the new words

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the new words

5、Gueing game

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the picture

2、Listen and do

Step4:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 5 Where is my ruler? Bike jeep taxi bus look out

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words 教学后记：学生对sentences习得较好。教学内容：Unit 5 Where is my ruler? (3)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s draw

2、Sing the song

3、Learn Part B: Let‟s talk

教学重点：Let‟s talk and Let‟s sing

教学难点：umbrella 的发音

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things 教学过程：

Step1: Revision Step2: Learn the sentences of Part B

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the sentences

4、Read the sentences

5、Perfor the dialogue

Step3: Let‟s play

1、Look at the pictures

2、Read the sentences

3、Play the game with your partner.Step4:Sing the song

1、Read the words

2、Listen to the tape

3、Sing the song

4、Sing and do

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 5 Where is my ruler? Umbrella under vest violin window wind

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences

3、Sing the song 教学后记：

学生对句子学习较好。

教学内容：Unit 5 Where is my ruler? (4)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the new words

2、Let‟s do and chant

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Greetings

2、Let‟s do

Step2: Learn the new words

1、Look at the VCD

2、Say out the words

3、Look and say

4、Listen to the recording

5、Listen and do

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Let‟s do

Step4:Let‟s chant

1、Listen to the tape

2、Say and do

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 5 Where is my ruler? Excuse me,Can I use your pencil? No problem.Where is my pencil?

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words

教学后记：

对句子的练习反馈较理想。

教学内容：Unit 5 Where is my ruler? (5)

教学目标和要求：

1、Try to understand the meaning of the story time

2、Try to know the culture.

3、Let‟s check

教学重点：Story tome; Culture; Let‟s check

教学难点：Let‟s check

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the recording

3、Read the sentences after the recording

4、Try to understand the meaning of story

5、Read the story

Step3: To know culture

1、Look at the pictures

2、The culture .

Step4:Let‟s sing

1、Listen to the recording

2、Read the words of the song

3、Sing the song after the recording

4、Sing the song together

Step5: Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 5 Where is my ruler?

Lamp walkman desk chair 作业布置：

1.Listen to the tape 2.Sing the song

教学后记：学生练习反馈较好。教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo(1)

教学目标和要求：

Learn the sentences of Part A

教学重点：The new sentences

教学难点：The new sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision Step2: Learn the new sentences

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the sentences after the tape

4、Read the sentences

5、Learn the new sentences

Step3: Let‟s play

1、Look at the sentences

2、Read the sentences

Step4:Do the exercises Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo (1) Small big long short

作业布置：

1.Listen to the tape

2.Read the sentences

教学后记：四会词句基本上掌握。

教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo (2)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s learn new sentences

2、Try to listen and do

3、Say out the animals.教学重点：the animals

教学难点：Say out the animals 教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things 教学过程：

Step1: Revision Ask and answer

Step2: Learn the animals

1、Look at the pictures

2、Find out the animals

3、Say out the animals

4、Listen to the tape

5、Read the words after the recording

6、Read and say the animals

7、Look and say

Step3: Let‟s do

1、Look at the pictures

2、Look at the animals

3、Listen to the tape

4、Listen and do

Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo It’s so big.

It has a long nose and a short tail.作业布置：

1.Listen to the tape 2.Read the animals 教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo (3)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the song

2、Learn the sentences of Part B

教学重点：The sentences

教学难点：The sentences

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、Say out the animals

2、Let‟s paint

Step2: Let‟s sing

1、Try to understand the meaning of the song

2、Listen to the recording

3、Sing after the tape

Step3: Let‟s talk

1、Ask and answer

2、Listen to the recording

3、Try to understand the dialogue

4、Read the dialogue

5、Act the dialogue out

Step5:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo Tall short giraffe deer

作业布置：

1、Listen to the recorder

2、Read the sentences

3、Draw a picture.

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo (4)

教学目标和要求：

1、Learn the sentences

2、Learn the animals .

教学重点：The new words

教学难点：The new words

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

Step2: Learn the new words of animals Look at the animals

1、Learn the new works

2、Listen to the recording

3、Read the words

4、Say out the animals

5、Step3: Let‟s do

5、Look at the pictures

6、Listen and do Step4: Exercises

1、活动手册

2、Look and say

Step5:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo

You’re right.作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the words.教学后记：学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo (5)

教学目标和要求：

1、Let‟s check

2、Let‟s chant

3、Story time 教学重点：Let‟s check/ Let‟s chant/ Story time 教学难点：Let‟s check

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures

教学过程：

Step1: Let‟s check

1、Listen to the tape

2、Finish the exercises

3、Check the answers

Step2: Let‟s chant

1、Look at the pictures

2、Find out the numbers.

3、Listen to the tape

4、Read the sentences after the recording

5、Read the sentences together

Step3: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Listen to the recorder

3、Try to understand the meaning of the story

4、Read the sentences after the recording

5、Read the sentences

Step4:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo AM PM TV CD VCD

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Read the sentences

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo (6) 教学目标和要求：

1、To know the culture

2、Learn the song

3、Finish the exercises

教学重点：The exercises 教学难点：The exercises

教学用具：Tape/recorder

教学过程：

Step1: To know the culture

1、Look at the pictures

2、Say out the lucky numbers.

Step2: Let‟s sing

1、Look at the words of the songs

2、Listen to the tape

3、Read the words

4、Sing the song

Step3: Finish the exercises

1、Listening work

2、活动手册

Step4:Summary and homework

板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo

Now you can say your ABC’S.

It’s as easy as 123!

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Finish the sentences

教学后记：

学生基本上掌握新单词及新句子.

教学内容：Unit 6 at the zoo（7）

教学目标和要求：

1、Try to understand Part C: story time

2、To know the culture:

3、Let‟s check

教学重点：Let‟s check.The song

教学难点：Story time

教学用具：Tape/recorder/pictures/things

教学过程：

Step1: Revision

1、The words

2、The sentences

Step2:Finish „Let‟s check”

1、Listen and chose the right answer.

2、Check your answers.

Step3: Story time

1、Look at the pictures

2、Try to understand the story

3、Listen to the tape

4、Say after the tape

Step4: Culture

Step5: Let‟s sing: Read the song

1、Listen to the tape

2、Sing together

Step6:Summary and homework 板书设计：

Unit 6 at the zoo (7)

How many animals do you know?

The big one is a gorilla.

作业布置：

1、Listen to the tape

2、Sing the song.教学后记：学生的练习反馈情况较好。

Unit 1 Hello! Leon 1 (Period 1) Teaching contents: A Let’s learn Let’s chant Teaching aims: 1.Let the students master the words: ruler, pencil, eraser, crayon. 2.When they see the objects, they can recognize and read them.Important and difficult points: Let the students master the words: ruler, pencil, eraser, crayon.Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach Teaching steps : Step 1 Greetings T: Good morning, boys and girls.Ss: Good morning, teacher.T: Welcome back to school.Step 2 Warm-up T: How are you? Ss: I’m fine, thank you.And you? T: I’m fine, too.Thank you.Step 3 Presentation 1.T: I have a pencil box.Do you have a pencil box? Ss: Yes, I do.T: Great! Boys and girls, gue.What’s in my pencil box? S1: Ruler.(Maybe in Chinese.) T: Yes, ruler.Follow me! Ruler, ruler, I have a ruler.(Learn the word “ruler”.)

2.Learn the words like that: ruler, pencil, eraser, crayon in English one by one.

3.Read the words together. Step4 Practice 1.Game:

Say what is it in your pencil-box.

-- I have a pen.

2.Teddy Bear asks: What’s this in English? Pupils say: eraser.Do as this. 3.Let’s chant

a. Listen to the tape, teacher do it first.

b. Let pupils follow teacher to do it and read Let’s chant.

c. Do it after tape like:

--I have a ruler.– Me too.Step 5 Homework 1.Ask the student to copy and remember the new words. 2.Listen to the tape after cla.

Bb Design:

Unit1 Hello! A Let’s learn Let’s chant

I have a ruler.

a pencil.

a crayon.

an eraser.

Unit 1 Hello! Leon 2 (Period 2) Teaching contents: A Let’s talk

Let’s play Teaching aims:

1.Try to make a self-introduction with the pattern “ I’m…”.2.Learn to use Hello, Hi to communicate with others.3.Learn to sing a song: Hello.Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach Teaching steps : Step 1 Greetings 1.T: Good morning, boys and girls.Ss: Good morning, teacher.T: Welcome back to school.2.Listen to the song: Hello.Step 2 Warm-up T: How are you? Ss: I’m fine, thank you.And you? T: I’m fine, too.Thank you.Step 3 Presentation 1.Teacher shows and introduces a new friend: a bear.“Hello.I’m Zoom.You can call me Zoom.” Goes to the pupils seat and greets to them, shake the hands.2.Ask pupils to practice this dialogue and later ask some pairs come to the front to act.

3.Listen and read after the tape, imitate the tape.4.Find a group of friends to make the conversation.Step4 Practice 1.Listen to the song: Hello and pa a box.If a

child get the box when the song is stopping, he(she) say: Hello(Hi)! I’m…

2.Some children who haven’t got the box stand up and introduce himself(herself): Hello(Hi)! I’m… Step 5 Homework 1.Ask the student to copy and remember the new sentences. 2.Listen to the tape after cla.

Bb design:

Unit1 Hello! A Let’s talk Let’s play

1.Hello, I’m… 2.Hi, I’m…

Unit1 Hello Leon three Teaching contents:

Let’s sing, Let’s find out, start to read Teaching aims: 1.After learning the letter song, the students know the pronunciations of 26 letters and know how to write them; 2.Be able to say 26 letters in order and can find out the letters in “Let’s find out”

and can circle the same letters in“Start to read”.Important and difficult points: 1. Be able to say 26 letters in order；

2.After learning the letter song, the students know the pronunciations of 26 letters and know how to write them;

Teaching methods: TPR,

Teaching proce : Step one :Listen to the letter song, let the students have initial perception.

Step two: Listen again, Try to sing the song together if you can sing it.

Step three: Sing the song together and then sing it with a variety ways.

Step four: Read the letters in “Start to read” and circle the same letters.

Step five: Finish the exercises in “Let’s find out”

Step six: Homework:Try to sing the letter songs.

Bb decign:

Unit 1 Hello

26 letters Teaching Reflection: 这首ABC歌学生以前有接触过，再加上反复播放并操练，学生基本都掌握了歌曲和26歌字母的读音，但较为薄弱的是，个别字母的读音记得不够牢固，如个别学生会把Gg和Jj 混淆。所以还需在以后的课堂不断强化。

Unit1 Hello

Leon four Teaching contents:

Let’s talk, Let’s play, Let’s check Teaching aims: 1.Be able to use the sentence “ What’s your name?”

to ask others names and use sentence “My name’s…” to introduce themselves.2.Be able to use “Goodbye” or “Bye” to say googbye.3.Can finish the exercise in “Let’s check”.Important and difficult points: 1.Be able to use the sentence “ What’s your name?”

to ask others names and use sentence “My name’s…” to introduce themselves.2.Be able to use “Goodbye” or “Bye” to say googbye.

Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach

Teaching proce : Step one ( Review): Ask several students to introduce themselves.Step two: ( Warm-up): Ask and answer( ask some of the rest students “What’s your name?” and lead them to answer “ My name is …” Step three（Presentation）:

1) Listen to the tape and answer the questions: “What are their names?” and “ What do they say to Mi White?” 2) Read the dialogue after the tape.Step four (Practice): 1) Remember names: Ask five students to the lectern and use the sentence “ Hello, my name’s ….” to introduce themselves one by one and then ask one of the rest to come and say “ Hello….” If he/she say right, each of that five students say “Hello!” or say “No”.and the game continue .2) Say “Goodbye to your friends”: Each friend say “Goodbye” to you in the PPT and you say “Bye,…” to your friends as quickly as you can.3) Finish the exercise in“ Let’s check”.Step five (expansion): make a survey about your clamates’ English names: Go around and introduce yourself (Hello, My name is …) and try to know more about your clamates’ English names ( Hello, what’s your name?) in one minute.Step six(Homework): 1) Try to act out the dialogue with your partner; 3) Make a survery to know some of your friends’ English name.Bb decign:

Unit1 Hello ( B Let’s talk)

Hello, I’m … What’s your name?-----

My name’s….

Goodbye!------Bye,… Teaching Reflection: 开始拥有自己的英文名，学生很兴奋，迫不及待想自我介绍，同时也对同学的英文名感到好奇，特别想知道，所以在教学活动中，学生都比较积极投入，对本节课的两个对话内容也掌握的比较好，但个别同学对个别句子的整个结构理解比较含糊，如My name’s …个别学生会把’s这细节漏掉，说出“My name….” 所以还需在以后的课堂不断强化练习。

Unit1 Hello

Leon five Teaching contents: Let’s learn, Let’s do, Read and count, Look and

match Teaching aims: 1.Be able to listen to, read and recognize these four words:(bag pen pencil box book).Important and difficult points: 1.Be able to listen to, read and recognize these four words:(bag pen pencil box book).Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach

Teaching proce : Step one ( Review): Ask several students to introduce the things in their pencil box.Step two（Presentation）:

1) Show the teaching picture and ask the students to find out “What does Zoom have?”

2) Lead in the new words one by one and teach them to read.Step three 1) Bomb Game

2) Sharp eyes: What does Zip have? Look and say it as quickly as you can.

3) Look or listen, and try to match ( I say words and you show me the pictures quickly or I show you pictures and you say the right words.) 4) Let’s do ( ①What stationeries can you hear? Listen and show me; ②Listen and do the action together; ③ Read and do the action together) 5) Finish the exercise in “Read and count” and “ Look and match”.Step four（Expansion）: Introduce your bag ( What’s in your bag?) Step five ( Homework) :

1) Finish the exercise about B Let’s learn; 2)

Make a survey and find out what are in your clamates’ bags.Bb decign:

Unit 1 Hello (B Let’s learn)

bag ( tip the picture of bag)

pen ( tip the picture of bag)

pencil box ( tip the picture of bag)

book( tip the picture of bag) Teaching Reflection: 本节课的个别单词，学生以为有接触过，所以学起来比较轻快，一节课过后，学生基本掌握了本节课的单词，个别学生对box 掌握不够好，会把它读成bo.往后的课堂要不断强化。

Unit1 Hello

Leon Six Teaching contents: Main Scene, Story time Teaching aims: 1.Catch the main dialogue in main scene.2.Know the main meaning of “Story time” and can answer some questions about “Story time”.Important and difficult points: 1.Catch the main dialogue in main scene.2.Know the main meaning of “Story time” and can answer some questions about “Story time”.

Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach

Teaching proce : Step one: Greeting Step two (Warm-up):Ask and Answer “Hello,What’s your name?” “My name is …” Step three( Presentation): 1) Look at the pictures in page 11 and answer the question“Who are they?”

2) Listen to the tape and answer the question“Is it Tutu?” and “Who’s there?” 3) Read after the tape

4) Watch the video and act out the dialogue.5) Watch the video about main scene and review the main sentences in this unit.

Step four( Homework) : Try to act out the story with your partner.

Bb decign

Unit 1 Hello！

Hello/Hi! I’m ….What’s your name?----

I’m/ My name’s…

Good bye!--- Bye,…

Teaching Reflection:

Unit2 Colours Leon one Teaching contents: A Let’s talk, Draw and say Teaching aims: 1.Know the main meaning of dialogue, and can read the dialogue with the correct pronunciation.2.Be able to use “Good morning!” to greet people in the real situation .3.Be able to use the sentence “This is …” to introduce others.4.Can differentiate “Mi” and “Mr” and use them correctly.Important and difficult points: 1.Know the main meaning of dialogue, and can read the dialogue with the correct pronunciation.2.Be able to use “Good morning!” to greet people in the real situation .3.Be able to use the sentence “This is …” to introduce others.4.Can differentiate “Mi” and “Mr” and use them correctly.

Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach

Teaching proce : Step one: Greeting Step two (lead in): 1.Show the picture of the morning sun, and lead the students to greet teacher and clamates.

2.Then show the pictures of their familiar teachers and lead them to say “Good morning, Mi/Mr…” and help them to differentiate “Mi” and “Mr”.

3.Show the pictures of the characters appear before and lead the students to use the sentence“ This is…” to introduce them. Step three( Presentation): 1.Show the pictures of Mi Green, Mi White and Mr Jones, Then ask them to find out each of them in the book of P14.2.Listen to the tape and the sentence in order.3.Read after the tape and act out it.Step four (Expansion): 1.Draw and say ( take out the pictures you draw before and introduce the character.Step five (Homework):

1) Act out the dialogue with your partner.2) Introduce your families or friends to your clamates. Bb decign:

Unit2 Colours

Mr/Mi… This is …----

Good morning, Mr/Mi…---

Good morning! Teaching Refection:

Unit2 Colours Leon two Teaching contents: A Let’s learn, Let’s do

Teaching aims: 1.Be able to read and recognize the colour words.

Important and difficult points: 1.Be able to read and recognize the colour words.

Teaching methods: TPR, the Situational Approach

Teaching proce : Step one: Greeting

Step two: (lead-in): Watch the video about “Let’s sing” and lead in the picture of rainbow.And ask the question“ What color is the rainbow?” “,How many colours are there?”, “What are they? ”

Step three ( Presentation): 1.Look at the picture and learn the new words one by one.Step four (Practice): 1.Show the pictures and ask “What color do you see?” and lead the students to answer “I can see…”

2.Look or listen, and say or do( I show the color crayon, and you say the right color word, or I say “ Show me….” And you choose the right one and show me.3.Listen to the tape about “Let’s do” and find out the colors mentioned.4.Listen again and put the crayons in the right order.5.Read after the tape and then read together with action.

Step five (Expansion): 1.Look at the picture and say the color of the things.Step six (Homework): 1.Draw a picture and color it.Bb decign:

Unit2 Colours

I can see red

yellow

green

blue

推荐第3篇：一年级快乐英语下册教案(全英)

Unit 1 Toys Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about toys and the new sentences: I have a new car.

2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.

3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.Teaching main : 1.The new words about toys and the new sentences: I have a new car.2.The chant and the song.Teaching difficult: It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.

Teaching aids: A recorder, tapes, cards and some toys

Leon 1 Teaching aim: I have a toy car.Key-point: A toy car Teaching methods: 1 Do pair work.2 Have a match Teaching aids: A tape recorder some toys Teaching proce:

Step 1.Warming-up Introduce myself Sing an English song.Step 2.New Leon : Learn the new words Learn the sentence: I have a toy car.Try to act the sentence Make up some new sentences Step 3.Do some practice 教学反思

Leon2 Teaching aim: I have a toy car.Key-point: I have a toy car .Teaching methods: Read the pictures Teaching aids: Some pictures tape recorder Teaching proce: Step 1.Greeting : Hello Good morning Stand up Sit down Step 2.New leon : Look at the pictures Learn the new words Learn the new sentences: I have a toy car.

Try to act the sentences Step 3.Practice the sentences one by one 教学反思

Leon3 Teaching aim: A toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Key-points: A toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and cards Teaching aids: Some cards and pictures Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing an English song Step 2.presentation : Teach the new words: car gun doll balloon teddy bear Read the words one by one Grasp the words The new phrases :a toy car a toy gun a doll a balloon a teddy bear Practice the phrases Step 3.Practice the phrases:

I have ...Step 4.Homework: Practice the words and phrases 教学反思

Leon4 Teaching aim: Chant Key-point: Chant Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and cards Teaching aids: Some cards and pictures Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Review the words Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to know the meanings: You have a balloon.A big yellow balloon.I have a ball.A small brown ball.Purple balls, brown balls.Bounce, bounce, bounce.Bounce the ball.

Lead the students to read it Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Read it one by one or in groups Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思

Leon5 Teaching aim: Sing the song Key-point: The song Teaching methods: Listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: I have a train.My train is coming.I have a car.My car is coming.My train is coming.Oh, yeah! My car is coming.Oh, yeah!

Read it one by one Learn how to sing the song Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the song out with your own body language Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song 教学反思

Leon6 Teaching aim: Toys and the exercise Key-points: the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder tapes Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find the toys Step 3.Practice : Do the exercises together

Listen to the tape again Step 4.Homework :grasp the toys name 教学反思

Unit 2 Food Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about food and the new sentences: I like hamburgers.What about you? I like rice.Have a hamburger.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’

speak English in daily life.

3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to learn what food they usually have everyday.2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult:

1.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.

2.Act out the chant and the song

Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food

Leon 1 Teaching aim: food Key-points: I like hamburgers.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: hamburger Ask the question: what do you like? Teach them the answer: I like hamburgers.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思

Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: a hamburger noodles rice vegetables chicken Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: a hamburger noodles rice Vegetables chicken Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思

Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: I like noodles.What about you? I like hamburgers.What about you? I like rice.And you? And you? I like soup and vegetables, too.Me too.Yummy! Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思

Oh, no.I’m full.Excuse me.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思

Leon5 Teaching aim: Food and the exercise Key-points: Food and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of food Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of food Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of the food 教学反思

Leon6 Teaching aim: Food and the exercise Key-points: Food and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the food cards Practice the new sentences: I like hamburgers.Have a hamburger.Yes, thanks Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the food names 教学反思

Listen to the tape again.

Unit 3 Drinks Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about drinks and the new sentences: Have some water, please.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.

3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to learn what drink they usually have everyday.2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: 3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.

4.Act out the chant and the song

Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food

Leon 1 Teaching aim: drinks Key-points: Have some water, please.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape

Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: water Teach them the sentence: Have some water, please.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思

Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: water tea coffee juice Coke Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up :

Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: water tea coffee juice Coke Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思

Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation :

Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: Would you like some water? Yes, please, please.Would you like some tea? Yes, please, please.Would you like some Coke? Yes, please, please.Would you like some juice? Yes, please, please.Would you like some coffee? Oh, no, thanks.What would you like? Tea, please.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思

Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song

Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: Have some coffee, please. Thank you.I like coffee.Have some juice, please.Thank you.I like juice.Would you like some Coke? Yes, please.What about some tea? No, thanks.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思

Leon5 Teaching aim: Drinks and the exercise Key-points: Drinks and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of drinks Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of drinks Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of the drinks 教学反思

Leon6 Teaching aim: drinks and the exercise

Key-points: drinks and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the drinks cards Practice the new sentences: Have some water, please.Thank you.I like water.Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the drinks names 教学反思

Unit 4 My body Teaching aims: Listen to the tape again.

1.Acquire the new words about body and the new sentences: Touch your nose, please.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.

3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to say the name of body 2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: 3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.

4.Act out the chant and the song

Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food

Leon 1 Teaching aim: body Key-points: Touch your nose, please.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation :

Teach the new word: nose Teach them the sentence: Touch your nose, please.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思

Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: eye ear nose face mouth Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: eye ear nose face mouth Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases

Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思

Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: Wash your hands.OK.My hands.Wash your face.OK.My face.Come on, come on.Come on and on.Hands and face, clean, clean, clean.

Point to his ears.OK.Ears.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思

Come on.Come on.My nose, my eyes, my mouth, my ears.Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents 教学反思

Leon5 Teaching aim: body and the exercise Key-points: body and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of body

Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of body Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of body 教学反思

Leon6 Teaching aim: body and the exercise Key-points: body and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the body cards Practice the new sentences: Touch your nose, please.Step 3.Practice :

Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the body names 教学反思

Unit 5 Sports Teaching aims: 1.Acquire the new words about sports and the new sentences: I can run.2.The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words and new sentences freely in daily life.And the teacher should cultivate the students’speak English in daily life.

3.The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themselves much while they are learning English.Teaching main : 1.Enable students to say the name of sports 2.Enable students to recite the chant and sing the song Teaching difficult: Listen to the tape again.

3.It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them correctly.

4.Act out the chant and the song

Teaching aids:A recorder, tapes, cards and some food

Leon1 Teaching aim: sports Key-points: I can run.Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new word: run Teach them the sentence: I can run.Step 3.Practice : Read the new sentences one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework : Practice the words and phrases 教学反思

Leon2 Teaching aim: learn the new words Key-points: ski skate swim play football play table tennis

Teaching methods: Read and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the new words: ski skate swim play football play table tennis

Read the words one by one Grasp the words and the new phrases Step 3.Practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape All of them can grasp.Step 4.Homework: Read the new words 教学反思

Leon3 Teaching aim: The chant Key-points: The chant Teaching methods: Read and listen Teaching aids: Computer cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Teach the chant and lead the students to learn one by one: You can ski, and I can ski, too. You can skate, and I can skate, too. You can swim, and I can swim, too. You can play football.Me too. What can you do? I can play table tennis.Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape Act the chant out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the chant 教学反思

Leon4 Teaching aim: The new song Key-points: The new song Teaching methods: Listen and sing Teaching aids: Cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Play the chant and let students say the chant together.Step 2.Presentation : Teach the song and lead the students to know the meaning of the song: What a sunny day! Let\'s go swimming.Swim, swim, swim with me.Swim, swim, swim far away.What a sunny day! Let\'s play football.Play, play, play with me.Football, football, kick this way! Step 3.practice : Read it one by one Listen to the tape and learn to sing the song Act the song out Step 4.Homework : Grasp the song and show it to your parents

教学反思

Leon5 Teaching aim: sports and the exercise Key-points: sports and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: Marker cards tape Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercises Listen to the tape and find out the pictures of sports Step 3.Practice : Listen to the tape again and do the exercise together Practice the names of sports Step 4.Homework : Grasp the names of sports 教学反思

Leon6 Teaching aim: sports and the exercise Key-points: sports and the exercise Teaching methods: Look at the pictures and listen to the tape Teaching aids: A tape recorder cards Teaching proce: Step 1.Warming-up : Sing a song Step 2.Presentation : Do the exercise Listen to the recorder and show the sports cards Practice the new sentences: I can run.

Step 3.Practice : Do the exercise together Ask and answer in pairs.Step 4.Homework : Grasp the sports names .教学反思

Listen to the tape again.

Unit 6 Happy Time

Leon 1 教学目标: 1.知识目标：The students should be teached to review these words: ski, skate, swim, play football, play table tennis.2．能力目标：The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.

3.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.The teacher shoule make full use of CAI and all kinds of tools to make the English claes vivid and interesting.The main method is using pictures with words to enable students to master the new knowledge.教学重点

Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点

It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well

and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具

课件，单词卡片，等等。教学过程： Step1 Greeting : T: Cla begins.P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…

1）讲解书本上的图片

让学生们根据图片说一说小朋友都在做什么。抽取若干学生说一

说，让学生尽情地发挥自己的想象力。 2）听录音连线 3）说句子

让学生模仿录音中所说的句子练习。

Step 4.Homework To review and remember the words.板书设计: Unit6 happy time ski, skate, swim, play football, play table tennis.

Unit 6 Happy Time

Leon 2 教学目标: 1.知识目标：通过教学图片和录音更好的掌握本课的娱乐小故事。

2．能力目标：The students are required to be able to speak and use these new words freely in daily life.The teacher should as much as he/she can encourage the students to speak English in daily life.

4.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.教学重点

Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点

It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具

课件，单词卡片，等等。教学过程： Step1 Greeting :

T: Cla begins.P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…

1.通过一段游乐园的视频来导入本课的内容。

2.和同学们一起讨论，大家去游乐园之后，都会玩那些娱乐项目，大家可以用简单的英语来表达一些，请同学们先讨论一下，之后我来请同学回答。

3.通过听录音来了解本课的内容，和同学们一起观看并表演。同学们可以充分发挥自己的想象力，来编演这个教学小故事。 4.通过一些教学图片来激发同学的想象力，来更好的演示小故

事。

5.最后请同学们自己好好练习并用英语来表达我们做的运动。Eg: I can playfootball I also can play table tennis.6.sing a song to end the cla.Step 4.Homework 复习课文，给父母讲述小故事。板书设计: Unit6 happy time I can playfootball

Unit 6 Happy Time

Leon 3 教学目标: 1.知识目标：愉悦的掌握本课的歌曲和句子。

5.情感目标：The teacher should create a condition where the students can enjoy themslves much while they are learning English.In other words, learning English should be a fun, not a boring job.教学重点

Enable students to learn what aliens usually do everyday.教学难点

It’s difficult for students to master these sentences well and pronounce them crrectly.教学工具

课件，单词卡片，等等。教学过程： Step1 Greeting : T: Cla begins.

P: Stand up and sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning teacher.T: Sing: Good morning, good morning, good morning children.P: Good morning teacher.T: Good morning children.P: Sit down, plsase Step 2.Warm up : Sing songs: Step 3 New cla presentation: Review: Ski, skate, Swim , play, football, play table tennis.复习句子：I can ski.I can skate.I can…

1.听录音。提问学生，在这段录音中，你听到了什么？ 2．通过学生的回答与正确的录音相结合，来说唱这些句子。 Eg: I like dogs.Dogs, dogs, dogs.Dogs can run.Run, run, run.3.向学生出示小鸟的图片。

通过上面的说唱例子，来带动学生编写新的小歌曲。

Eg: I like birds.Birds, birds, birds.Birds can fly.Fly, fly, fly.4.依次出示小孩，小鹿，青蛙，的例子来一一说唱。 Step 4.Homework 给父母说唱小故事。板书设计: Unit6 happy time I like dogs.

鱼的图片，模仿上面小猪，

推荐第4篇：人教版英语六年级下册全英教案

Unit 2 last weekend Period 1 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Lead-in 1.Use the cards to learn new words. T:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room .Follow me to read. 2.Use the same teaching method to teach play football,go swimming,go skating.Step 3 Pair work Role play 1.Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.2.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Read new words by themselves. 2.Listen to the tape and read after it. 3.Give enough time to read them . the exercise using the sentences.Step 4 Homework Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection: 1.Some students are good in English cla.2.The pronunciation of two students are not very good.3.Half students can finish exercise book in English cla.

Unit 2 last weekend Period 2 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision 1.Review the words . 2.Review the “ Let’s talk ” of Part A Presentation 1.Open the book “ let ’s learn ”. 2.Teacher show cards of the new words : read a book , saw a film , had a cold , slept , last night , the day before yesterday , last weekend 3.Listen to me carefully 4.Read after me 5.Listen to the tape and read after it 6.Learn the key sentences : What did you do last weekend? I saw a film. Did you like it? Yes, I did.It was great. 7.Translate into Chinese and teacher explain Step 3 Pair work Role play Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Read new words by themselves 2.Listen to the tape and read after it 3.Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework

Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection: 1.Some students are good in English cla.2.The pronunciation of two students are not very good.3.Half students can finish exercise book in English cla.

Unit 2 last weekend Period 3 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”

Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”

2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework

Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:

Unit 2 last weekend Period 4 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”

Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play 3.Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.4.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”

2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework

Read and write down the new words Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:

Unit 2 last weekend Period 5 Teaching aims: 1.To learn the new phrases : read a book , watch TV,wash the clothes ,stay at home ,clean the room 2.To learn the key sentences.3.Student can make sentences use the key sentences.Important points Key sentences:How was your weekend?It’was good .What did you do?I stayed at home with your grandma.Was it interesting?Did you see a film?No,I had a cold.Difficult points : Make sentences Teaching aids :The word cards , a tape PPT Teaching procedures: Step 1 Greetings and warm-up. T:Hello,boys and girls!What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend. T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I...Go over new phrases:watch TV,wash the clothes,stay at home,clean the room Step 2:Revision Review the “Let’s talk ”

Let’s check 1.First , open your book and turn to page twenty 2.Listen and number 3.Listen again and number the phrases Let’s wrap it up Read and complete the sentences Step 3 Pair work Role play Story time Answer the questions T: What do you do on the weekend? Ss:I often do homework on the weekend.T:What did you do on the weekend? Ss:I did homework on the weekend.Ask and write Ask about your partner’s the same questions.To finish Practice 1.Recite the “ Let’s talk ”

2 .Read “ Let’s talk ” by themselves 3 .Give enough time to read them Step 4 Homework Read Story time Step 5:Blackboard design Unit 2 Last weekend Cleaned my room washed my clothes stayed at home watched TV Teaching reflection:

推荐第5篇：pep四年级英语下册全英教案

教材总体分析

一、教学内容：

PEP小学英语四年级下册

四年级上册共6个单元、2个复习单元。 Unit 1 Our School

Unit 2 What time is it? Unit 3 Is this your skirt? Unit 4 It’s warm today! Unit 5 How much is it ? Unit 6 At a farm 每单元分“A、B、C”三个部分。每个单元的最开始有一个主情景图，呈现本单元的主要教学内容。接下A和B部分Let’s learn主要学习生单词，Let’s do或Let’s play 是提供活动来练习和巩固这些生单词的。Let’s talk主要学习交际用语，Let’s chant或Group work通过TPR和游戏来巩固所学语言。Read and write、Write and say主要是培养学生的四会能力和阅读能力。C部分主要是适当扩展学生的语言能力，复习和巩固所学语言。而Good to know施以通俗易懂的方式展示中西方文化的差异。教材所蕴含的能力体系：听：Let’s check 能听懂录音并找出正确答案。说：Let’s talk 能运用所学日常用语进行交流；读：四年级上册Read and write 能正确地读出字母的发音以及字母在单词里的发音；写Write and say 能按笔顺正确地书写26个英文字母；做：Let’s do能通过看图片了解并会做相应的动作。

二、教学目标：听、做

1.能根据教师的语言、动作、事实物等提示听懂所学内容。2.能听懂课堂指令并作出正确的反应。

3.能根据指令做事情，如：指图片、画图、做动作、做手工等说、唱：

1.能根据录音内容模仿说唱。

2.能听懂、会说12组会话，并能进行简单的交流。3.能唱8首歌曲。

4.能根据图画说出单词或短句。玩、演 1.能用英语做游戏。

2.能表演英文歌曲或歌谣。3.能就所学内容参与角色表演。认、读：

1.66个单词和听、说、读、写26个字母并且能听、说、读、写。

2.36个单词（包括教室、书包、同学、家具、住宅结构、家庭成员、职业、数字、爱好、食品和饮料、餐具等几个话题），和进行简单的运用

三、教学重点：单词教学

四、教学难点：会话教学

五、教材编写特点：

教材教材的主要编写特点：本套教材的编写思路是以话题为纲，以交际功能和语言结构为主线，逐步引导学生运用英语完成有实际意义的语言任务，即：话题—功能—结构—任务。

1、注重学生语言运用能力的培养，突出语言的实践性和交际性，同时也突出语言的真实性和实用性。本书的语言材料真实地道，活泼有趣，可以发展学生学习英语的自主能力。

2、注重学生自学能力和学习策略的培养，为学生的进一步学习或终身学习奠定基础。

3、注重中外文化的双向交流，使学生通过学习，培养未来跨文化交际所需要的能力。

4、注重学生学习兴趣的培养，以不同方式最大限度的激发学生的学习动机。.全书配有彩色卡通式插图，设计新颖活泼，生动有趣，这样可以激发学生的学习动机和学习。

5、注重融合学科内容，加强学科之间的整合和渗透，让学生通过英语学习来获得其他学科的知识。

6、注重教材的灵活性和可操作性，以满足不同层次的学生的需求。

7、注重教学资料的配套，为学生提供良好的英语学习环境，帮助学生拓展自我发展的空间。每课/课本由主干系统和辅助系统两部分组成。主干系统是由let’s learn, let’s talk, read and write这三部分组成；辅助系统是由main scene, let’s do,let’s play, write and say, story time.各个部分都配有彩图，设计新颖，语言地道，联系学生的实际。

8、注重中小学各阶段的衔接，以保证各学段的顺利过渡，全面提高中小学英语教学的整体质量。

六、应注意的问题：

1、会话教学（Let’s talk / Let’s play）这部分主要采用情境教学法，利用表演和游戏的方式融会话于情境教学中，在情景中运用语言。师生一起在表演中教，在表演中学，在交际活动中用。

2、词汇教学（Let’s learn / Let’s do）这部分采用直观演示法，即利用游戏，使用实物或卡片；并且融词汇于会话教学中；充分发挥TPR活动的优势；详细讲授单词的结构和书写。

3、字母教学（Read and write）四年级上册的字母教学1.可以开展一些模仿竞赛活动教学字母的发音;2.利用卡片，投影，多媒体，描红等手段指导学生正确地书写字母3.利用游戏促进和巩固对字母的记忆。

4、阅读教学：讲授重点应放在四会单词和句子上。2.引导学生掌握四会句子，着重强调复数结构。3.鼓励学生替换句型中的关键词造新句。要求：听、说、读、写四会单词和句子。

5．其他板块教学（Let’s sing / Let’s chant）。这部分主要采用全身反应教学法，除了用于Warm-up中，也可以不断重复使用于教学过程中。

1、在每节课中渗透2.灵活运用于各个教学环节（引入、复习或放松气氛）3.采取多种表演活动进行学习，story time 要因材施教，根据不同学生的程度进行教学。4.课内与课外结合使用。

七、教学准备：录音机，课件，卡片，磁带。

八、课时安排：每周2课时，每单元4课时。

Unit 1单元教材分析

Teaching Contents: Unit 1 Our School Teaching Aims: 1 Words: playground garden teacher’s office library canteen computer room washroom music room gym TV room 2 Sentences: Where is the canteen?-It’s on the first floor The art room is on the first floor Is this the library? Yes ,it is ./No ,it isn’t .Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four

Period 1 Teaching Aims：

1.To find out whether the students have got the key words or not.2.Find out whether the students have got the main sentences or not.3.Double check whether they have got the rules of the pronunciation of the letter Aa 4.Double whether they have got the way of writing an English sentence.Important points and difficult points: 1.Remind them to remember the rules of writing an English sentence.2.Remind them how to figure out the pronunciation of letter Aa.3.Try to use the main sentences to make their own sentences.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, courseware, pictures.Teaching steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.Are you happy today? If so, let’s sing a song together ‘ Our School’, 2.Revision a.Key words revision: Let the cla use the key words to make some sentences.Have a dictation.b. A competition, different group has different words: Computer school that board Teacher map yes wall Picture this light floor c.Main sentences: Is this „? Is that „? Yes, it is.No, it isn’t.

Exercises: to complete a dialogue A: Welcome to our school! This is the teacher’s office.

That is my claroom B: How many students are there in your cla? A: Forty-five.D.Exercises of pronunciation: a.To judge which words group have the same sound (1) Apple, plate, (2) have, make (3) bag, at (4) hat, face (5)grape, snake (6) cat, plane E.Exercise for multiple choice. ( ) 1.Let’s go and have a ______!

A.see B.meet C.look ( ) 2.Welcome ____ my home! A.in B.to C.at ( ) 3.The art room is on ____second floor.A./ B.a C.the ( ) 4.This _____ my claroom A.are B.am C.is F.If time is enough, the cla may do more exercises in the Active book.4.Homework: a.To copy five stars words four times each. b.To read and recite Let’s talk.Board-writing:

Unit 1 Our School Playground Where is the„? Garden It’s on/in/near„.

Teacher’s office

Library

Canteen

Period 2 Teaching Aims: 1.1 Learn the four words in listing, speaking, reading 2.Learn the new expreions: welcome to, this is, that is, this way, please , your school is beautiful! 3.To develop the students’interest in English.Important points and difficult points: To master these two sentences: This is the teacher’s office.That is my claroom.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, course ware, pictures.Teaching steps: 1.Warming-up a.Greetings & Let’s do.b.Daily report.2.Presentation a.What’s in the claroom? A board, fourteen lights, „.Let the children introduce their claroom, and then tell them two visitors will visit our school, let’s welcome them.b.To play the VCD, and then question the cla: How many students are there in Chenjie’s cla? Does Chenjie have lunch at school? c.Read the dialogue after the tape.d.Read after the teacherRead the text smoothly. f.Practice the dialogue.g.Act the dialogue.h.Game: By using the cards: This is my That is Board-writing:

Unit 1 Our School Welcome to our school.How many students are there in your claroom?

Do you have a library? This way ,please.

Period 3 Teaching aims: 1.Learn these six words and expreions: art room, computer room, washroom, music room, gym, TV room and second in listening, speaking and reading.1.Learn the Part Let’s chant.

Go on to learn the song “ Our School”.

4.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.5.To train the students’ creativity.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids:a tape-recorder pictures cards

Important points and difficult points: 1.To master the six words and expreions: art room, computer room, washroom, music room, gym, TV room.2.To understand the word “ second”.

3.Read in the library, draw in the art room, eat in the canteen, play in the gym.Teaching steps:

1.Warming-up a.Let’s do, A let’s talk, b.Daily greetings and report c.Learn to sing the song “ Our School”.2.Preview The teacher says one sentence like this: I can see many flowers in it.Where is it? The children may answer: It’s in the garden.To give more exercises.3.Presentation a.Let the children act the Part Let’s do, and then ask them: Where do we water the flowers? The cla will answer: In the garden.The teacher goes on to ask: Where do we have computer cla? In the computer room.Where do we draw? In the art room.Where do we wash our hands? In the washroom.Where do we sing? In the music room.Where do we play? In the gym.Where do we watch TV? In the TV room.b.Watch the VCD.c.Let’s chant.

School days, school days.What a lot of fun! Read in the library.Draw in the art room.Eat in the canteen.Play in the gym.School days, school days.What a lot of fun! d.A game: To put the flash cards on the board, and then let the one of them come out to gue out the word in the flash card.Part Let’s play.e.To read the book in Page 7: Where is the art room? It’s on the second floor.The sentence pattern: Where is „? It’s„ Homework Let the students to memorize the words.Recite the whole dialogue.Board-writing:

Unit 1 Our School art room, computer room, wash room, music room, gym, TV room, Where is the art room? It’s on the second floor

Period 4 Teaching aims 1.Learn these main sentences: Is this the library? Is that the TV room? 2.Learn to use the sentence pattern: Is this „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.Is that„? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

To imagine a school in the future, and introduce one’s school in English.3.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.4.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.The sentence patterns: Is this „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

2.Learn to use these two words: this & that Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching aids: Computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, courseware, pictures..Teaching steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.How are you? / How are you doing today? b.Daily report: what day is today? What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? 2.Preview to talk about this topic: What’s in our school? Let the children answer in English, they may answer: There are art rooms, computer rooms, music rooms, a gym and many TV rooms.3.Presentation a.To show the headmaster’s photo, and ask the cla: Who is she? Yes, she is our headmaster.Do you want to be a headmaster? Today Wu Yifan is a headmaster is a headmaster.He has a new school.Do you want to have a look? b.Let the cla watch the VCD, while they are watching, ask them some questions: Is this the„? Is that the„?

Let the children answer: Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

c.To practise the sentence patter: Is this „? Is that„? To put the flash cards on the board, and roll over them.d.Let the children listen to the tape.e.Act the dialogue.f.A project.To design a school.g.Do some exercises in the Workbook.Homework Ask the students to memorize the text and listen to the tape after cla and try to imitate the tape.Board-writing:

Unit 1 Our School Is this the library? Is that the art room?

Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

Unit 2单元教材分析

Teaching Contents:

Unit 2 What time is it?

Teaching Aims: 1 .Learn to know how to ask the time and answer the time correctly.2.Be able to describe one’s own usual activities using the language items learned before.3.Learn to know some new instructions like : Time for breakfast.4.Be able to learn and make one’s own schedule for usual activities.5.Learn to make a clock by oneself Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: 1.Learn to master the words and sentences of Read and write in listening, speaking, reading, and writing.2.Learn to know the words and sentences in Let’s learn and Let’s talk.Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four

Period 1

Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to know the key words in this period in listening, speaking and reading.2.Learn to know the main sentences: What time is it? It’s„/ It’s time for„.3.Try to know some instructions: Time for breakfast.Important points and difficult points: 1.Try to know and master the key words in this period.2.Learn to know and use the new sentences.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: computer, word cards, flash cards, VCD, pictures, tape, tape-recorder etc

Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings.b.Play the tape for Ss to listen and review Story time of Unit 1, then let Ss act out the story in groups.2.Preview a.Ask and answer.Where is Zoom? He’s in the canteen.Why? He’s hungry.Why is he hungry? b. What time is it? It’s time for lun Free talk: Let Ss talk about what can tell us the time.E.g.The sun, the moon, the tree etc.3.Presentation a.Show Ss a clock, say and talk.Look! What is this? It’s a clock.Point to 12 and ask: What time is it? It’s 12 o’clock.Are you hungry? Why? It’s time for lunch.b.Practice.Change the time, ask Ss quickly.What time is it? It’s 9 o’clock.It’s time for English cla./P.E cla/ music cla c.Listen and repeat.Let Ss listen to the tape, repeat together.d.Game: (response quickly) Change the time in the clock, ask Ss: What time is it? To see who can answer more quickly.e.Gueing.Show Ss flash cards quickly, ask Ss to gue the words and new expreions.f.Draw and write.To draw some clocks in order to show one’s own schedule.g.Listen and do.h.Exercises in the activity book 4.Homework Master the new phrases.Listen to the tape and imitate the accent.Board-writing:

Unit 2 What time Is It? music cla What time is it?

P.E cla It’s„.English cla It’s time for„.

breakfast lunch

dinner

Period 2

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the new words and expreions.2.Learn to know the main idea of the dialogue.3.Be able to listen and read the dialogue well.4.Be able to use the main sentences skillfully.5.To train the students’ ability of working in groups.6.Education students to be a child hospitality .Difficult points: 1.Try to master the main sentences like: What time is it? It is„.It’s time for„.2.Learn to understand some oral items in this dialogue like: Just a minute; School is over; Let’s run; go home.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, picture, cards, caette, Teaching Steps: 1.Warm up.a.Sing a song.(One Two Three„) b.Greetings.What day is it? What is the date today? c.Listen and do.(A Let’s do) d.Presentation.Show some instructions: Cla is over.School is over.What do you do? Go home.Let’s go to the playground.Let’s watch TV.e.Free talk. Show Ss a chart.Let them look and think carefully and try to say some sentences about the picture.Ask them some questions.f.Watch and listen. Let Ss watch VCD, listen carefully, try to understand the main idea of the dialogue.Explain any difficulties to help them.g.Make sentences using the following sentence drill.It’s time for„Listen and repeat, pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.h.Group work.Read the dialogue aloud in groups.i. Act out .Ask some groups to act out it.Or the teacher can act out John.j. Do exercise on the activity book.2.Aignment.a.Listen and read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercises.3.Homework Listen to the tape and read the dialogue.Make a new dialogue.Board-writing:

Unit 2 What Time Is It? over School is over.Now What time is it now? Kid Go home , kids.

Just a minute.Let’s run.

Period 3

Teaching Aims: 1 Listen, speak and read the key expreion.2.Understand the main sentence and try to use it skillfully.3.To train the students’ ability of working in groups.4.Education students to be a child hospitality .Difficult points: omputer, Caette, Caette recorder, flash cards, A teaching clock.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: A tape-recorder a schoolbag with some books in it Teaching Steps: 1.Warm up.a.Play a game.Try to practice the numbers.Write down some math problems like: 16+39-35 =? Ss quickly give me the answers orally.b.Greetings.2.Preview.a.Let’s chant.b.Ask and answer.3.Presentation.Let’s learn a.Play a game.( Gueing the time) What time is it? It’s time for„ It’s time to„

b.Make types of clock using hands.Ask: What time is it? It’s 4:35.School is over.Where do you go? We go home.c.Present new sentence: It’s time to go home.It’s time to go to school.d.Listen and do.Give Ss some orders, let Ss do actions.e.Listen and repeat.Pay attention to the pronunciation and intonation.f.Drills.Drill the sentence drill: It’s time to„ using “A Let’s do”.g.Draw and say.Draw their own time table and talk about what they do in the different time.For example: It’s 6 o’clock.It’s time to get up.4.Aignment a.Finish the exercise on the activity book.b.Read the chant aloud.c.Copy down the words expreions Board-writing:

Unit 2 What Time Is It? get up go to school go home go to bed It’s time to„.

Period 4

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the key words in four skills.2.Be able to read the dialogue correctly.Be able to read and write the words and sentences well.Difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape-recorder some cards Teaching Steps: 1.Warm –up a.Chant together with actions.b.Daily report.What day is today? What is the date today? It’s March,...What’s the weather like today? 2.Preview.a.Using the schedule, ask and answer.Say: Tick, tock, tick, tock, says the clock.It’s 7:00.Answer: It’s time for breakfast.b.Play a game: Show Ss the time, choose any one to say like this: It’s„ It’s time for„.3.Presentation: Group competition: Divide Ss into four groups, try to say the time quickly.a.Listen to the tape.Let the Ss understand the contents.b.Give Ss some questions for the dialogue, ask them to answer randomly.c. Listen and repeat.d.Ask some pairs to act out.e.Play a game. Ss show their own schedule, they play the game in pairs.A: Tick, tock, tick, tock, says the clock.It’s 12 o’clock.B: It’s time for lunch.f.Write the words and the main sentences by themselves.4.Consolidation and extension a.Finish the exercise on the activity book about B Read and write.b.Copy down the words and the main sentences one line each.c.Make a clock by themselves.Board-writing:

Unit 2 What time is it? 8:30 It’s time for English cla.9:45 math cla 3:20 Chinese cla 4:15 music cla 5:00 P.E.cla

Unit 3单元教材分析

Teaching Contents:

Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to describe the size of the clothes, the colour of the clothes.2.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.3.Learn to know and understand the sentences of Let’s learn & Let’s talk.4.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do & Let’s chant.5.Learn to understand the story time and Good to know.6.Cultivate them to co-operate with each other, encourage them to create.Teaching Points: Words and letters Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four

Period 1

Teaching Aims: 1.1.Further understand the colors in English.2.Learn to say the keywords about the clothes.3.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do with some actions.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up: a.Greetings: How are you? How was your weekend? b.B.Date & weather.What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision c.The teacher asks the cla: What’s your favourite colour? What colour do you like best? d.A game: Gue what colour of the crayons in Mi Guo’s hands? 3.Presentation & consolidation a.The teacher will say: What is Mi Guo wearing today? I’m wearing a shirt today.What are you wearing today? You are wearing school uniforms today.I’m wearing „ .

b.The teacher will show the cards to the cla one by one: jacket, sweater, skirt, dre, shirt, T-shirt.c.Try to use the new words to make some sentences such as: I like the „ I like the „ with the „ .

d.A game: let them further understand the new words, what word is miing? Or what’s in my hand? e.Listen to the tape, and get the general idea of the sentences.Especially the verbs: put on, hang up, take off, put away, fold & wash.Help them to master these phrases.They can make their own sentences with the verb phrases.f.Group work: Watch the VCD first, and then practise the sentences with their groups and with some actions.g.Free talk: what color is your T-shirt? What color is your jacket? 3.Homework: a.To copy the new words one line for each To read Let’s do aloud..Board-writing:

Unit 3 Is this your skirt? skirt Put on „ .shirt Take off „ .T-shirt Hang up „ .jacket Fold up „ .Sweater Wash „ .dre Put away„

Period 2

Teaching Aims: 1.1.Learn to master the four-skilled words about the colours.2.Learn to master the way to write the key words and the sentences.3.Try to understand the meaning of the dialogue.4.Learn to read the chant.5.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.Learn to master the right way to write the key words and the sentences.2.Try to read the first part of the chant.3.Try to make an own dialogue with the sentences they have learnt.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up.Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Date & weather: What’s the date?

What’s the weather like outside?

c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.2.Revision a.The teacher asks: What are you wearing today? I’m wearing „ .

b.Read the chant of Page 31.3.Presentation & consolidation.a.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What colour is your shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? b.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: How many colours can you see? How many animals can you see? Is this T-shirt the rabbits’?

What colour is the rabbit’s T-shirt? What colour is the dog’s T-shirt? What about the cat’s?

c.Listen to the tape, read after it.d.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.e.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.f.To use the sentence structures: ‘Is this your „?’ To make more different sentences.4.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each. b.Copy down the sentences two-line each Board-writing:

Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? red Is this your „? blue No, it isn’t.yellow No, it’s not.Green White

Period 3

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to master the main words about clothes.2.Learn to ask and answer about the clothes colour in plural form.3.Try to understand the meaning of the chant.4.Learn to read the chant.5.To educate the students to love their school and to be a helpful student.6.To train the students’ creativity.Important points and difficult points: 1.Try to read the chant, get to know the words like socks, shoes, pants, shorts, with, are, together.2.Ask and answer about the colours of clothes in plural form.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 3.Warm-up.A Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Date & weather: What’s the date?

What’s the weather like outside?

c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.Step 2.Presentation .Use flash cards to teach the main words: jeans, shorts, socks, shoes and pants.2.Use pictures or real objects to ask: what colour are the „? They are„.

Step 3.Presentation & consolidation.b.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What colour is your shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? What colour are your shoes/pants/„?

b.Let the cla figure out “are” and “is”.“are” is used in a plural form.“is” is used in a singular form.a.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: How many colours can you see? How many animals can you see? Is this T-shirt the rabbits’?

What colour is the rabbit’s T-shirt? What colour is the dog’s T-shirt? What about the cat’s?

b.Listen to the tape, read after it.c.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.d.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.e.To use ‘what colour are the„? They are„.’ To make more different sentences.See which students can do more.5.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each.c.Copy down the sentences two-line each.d.Board-writing:

Unit 3 Is This Your Skirt? Where are my shoes\\ shorts\\ pants\\ socks\\jeans? They are „„Make friends.Play computer games.

Period 4

Teaching Aims: 1.1.Learn to master the five key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.2.Learn to know how to describe the clothes.3.Learn to know how to write the main sentences.4.Learn to understand the dialogue.

5.When they see the objects, they can recognize and read them and do the action about them.Important points and difficult points: 1.The sentences written should be concerned.Pay attention to their first letter of a sentence and the full stop.2.Try to master or memorize the key words in the cla.Otherwise they will feel too much preure on them.3.Try to act out the dialogue.Master the way to ask the colours.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: a tape recorder cards pictures Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up Greetings: How are you feeling today? What’s the date? What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision: a.Let them say the names of the clothes.First: pants, shorts, jeans, shoes, socks, T-shirt, shirt, skirt, jacket and dre Try to describe their own clothes: This is my T-shirt.My T-shirt is blue.3.Presentation & consolidation a.Watch the VCD; let them get the general idea of the dialogue.Ask them what words they have heard and what colour they are.b.The teacher will show a chart on the board and then ask: (1).What time is it? (2) What clothes does Zip have for her birthday party? (3) What colour is the dre? (4) Which one is pretty? c.Let them ask some questions about the chart.They can imagine or ask.d.A game.Use the letters to make words of clothes.a e i o u s h r d j t p k n l c e.Let the children take out their exercises book and try to make some sentences: What colour is it? It’s white.f.Act out the dialogue.g.Written exercise for phonetics: cake apple hat face bag have we desk egg pen he she have snake three me cat apple make grape 4.Homework a.Copy down the main new words one line each.b.To read the dialogue aloud.Board-writing:

Unit 3 Is this your skirt?

Skirt What colour is it? Shirt It’s white.

Jacket I have a new dre for my birthday dre party.T-shirt This red T-shirt is pretty

Unit 4单元教材分析

Teaching Contents:

Unit4 It’s warm today

Teaching Aims: 1. Learn to describe the weather.2.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking, reading and writing.3.Learn to know and understand the sentences of Let’s learn, Read and write & Let’s talk.

4.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s do & Let’s chant.5.Learn to understand the story time and Good to know.Teaching Points: 1. Try to say the weathers.2.The plural forms and the singular forms of the clothes .3.Try to say the size of the clothes in English.4.Try to expre and use the sentences:what’s the weather like„? It’ „.

5.Try to write the key words properly.Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Pictures, Cards, Tape.Teaching Times: Four

Period 1

Teaching Aims: 1.To act quickly after listening to the T.2.Master the sentences: This is my home.You can see a bedroom...3.New words: study bathroom bedroom living room kitchen Important points and difficult points: 1.Learn to understand the key words in listening, speaking and reading.2.Try to understand the word, and use them into sentences.Learn to understand the sentences of What’s the weather like in„? It’s „ .

Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: A tape-recorder，an English book, a Chinese book, a storybook, a notebook and a math book.Teaching Steps: 2.Warm-up: b.Greetings: How are you? c.B.Date ,day& weather.What’s the date today? What’s the weather like today? What day is it today? 2.Revision d.The teacher asks the cla: What’s your favourite clothes? What colour is your„?

e.A game: Gue what colour of the clothes? 3.Presentation & consolidation The teacher will say: What’s weather like today? It’s„. h.The teacher will show the cards to the cla one by one: cool, cold, hot, warm.i.Try to use the new words to make some sentences such as: What’s the weather like„? It’s „

j.A game: let them further understand the new words, what word is miing? Or what’s in my hand?

k.Listen to the tape, and get the general idea of the sentences.l.Group work: Watch the VCD first, and then practise the sentences with their group.m.Free talk: What’s the weather like today? It’s„ .4.Homework: a.To copy the new words one line for each b.Ready for a weather report.Board-writing:

Unit 4 It’s warm today! weather, cool, cold, hot, warm.What’s the weather like in„?

It’s „ .

Period 2

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to understand the sentences of Let’s talk.2.Learn to expre the weather.3.Learn to know the “Can I wear„?” ask and answer.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up a.Greetings: How are you? Fine, thank you.b.Day,Date & weather: What’s the weather like today? 2.Revision: a.To review the weather report: This is the weather report„.It’s „.And so on.

b.To review the main words about weather Further understand the pronunciation of the main words.Especially the words: weather, wear, today, can’t, put on.

3.Presentation & consolidation: a.The teacher will point to a picture and say: Is it cool today? They will answer: Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

b.Let the cla practise in pairs: Is it hot „? Yes, it is./ No, it isn’t.

c.The teacher points to the picture and asks: what’s the weather like„? It’s „.Can I wear„? Yes, you can./ No, you can’t.Then the teacher asks the questions one by one till all the students understand.d.Let the cla make sentences with the structure: It’„today.Can I wear„?

Yes, you can./ No, you can’t.

e.To watch the VCD, then the teacher will ask some questions according to the dialogue.f.To practise the dialogue in groups/pairs, then act out the dialogue.4.Homework: a.To copy the main words each one line.b.To read the dialogue aloud.Board-writing:

Unit 4 It’s warm today!

Can I wear „ ?

Yes, you can./ No, you can’t It’s warm/hot/cool/cold today.

Period 3

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to master the four-skilled words about the weather.2.Learn to master the way to write the key words and the sentences.3.Try to understand the meaning of the dialogue.4.Learn to read the chant.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, flash cards, some objects.Teaching Steps: 4.Warm-up.Greetings: How are you feeling today? b.Day,date & weather: What’s the date?

What’s the weather like outside? It’s„.c.Read a chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue.My dre is old.My sweater is new.2.Revision a.The teacher asks: What are you wearing today? I’m wearing „ .

b.Read the chant of Page 47.3.Presentation & consolidation.e.After the kids read the chant, the teacher will ask some questions: What’s the weather like will you wear shirt/jacket/dre/skirt? c.The teacher shows a chart on the board.Let them talk about the chart such as: What’s the weather like in„?

Can I wear„?

d.Listen to the tape, read after it.e.Groups work: Ask the students to read by roles and see which group can do the best.f.A game: Try to remember or memorize the key words in the cla.g.To use the sentence structures: Put on„ / Take off„ To make more different sentences.6.Homework: a.To copy down the new words one line each. b.Copy down the sentences two-line each.Board-writing:

Unit 4 It’s warm today! hot warm cool cold Put on„ / Take off„

Period 4

Teaching Aims: 1.Learn to know the key words in listening, speaking and reading.2.Learn to figure out the words : rainy, windy, sunny, cloudy, snowy.3.Try to describe the weather: Here’s the world weather.It’s„ in„.

Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: VCD, computer, a chart, caette and the recorder, wall pictures, flash cards.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm-up.a.Greetings: Ask some of them to greet or ask some questions.b.Date & weather report.c.A song 2.Revision 3.Presentation & consolidation a.The teacher will say: what’s the weather like in„? It’s „. b.Practise the sentences in pairs.c.Let them make the sentences with “Here’s the world weather.It’s „ in„.”

d.Watch the VCD; let them get the general idea of the dialogue.e.Ask and Answer: What’s the weather like in„? It’s„.

f.Group work: Practise the dialogue in groups g.Make a weather report in the world.4.Homework a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Copy the main words and sentences two times each.Board-writing:

Unit 4 rainy windy sunny cloudy snowy Here’s the world weather.It’s „ in„.

Unit 5单元教材分析

Teaching Contents:

Unit 5 How much is it ?

Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to describe the size of the shoes and the clothes, talk about the price, colour and style.( It’s expensive/ colourful.) 2.Be able to ask the price and make some suggestions.3.Try to do actions according to the commands

Teaching Points: Words and sentences Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teahing Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards..Teaching Times: Four

Period 1

Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read the words: colourful, pretty, cheap, and expensive.2.Be able to talk about the colours, price and style: It’s expensive/ colourful/ pretty/ cheap.3.Be able to chant the rhyme well.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 1.Warm –up.a.Free talk Ask some questions like the following: T: What’s the weather like today? Ss: It’s cloudy and warm. T: Can you wear your sweater? Ss: No, I can’t.b.Let’s chant.Mmm, It’s warm today.2.Preview.Let’s chant: My shirt is red.My jacket is blue„.Try to present the new words in a natural way.3.Presentation.Let’s learn.(1) Draw different clothes with nice colors on the blackboard.Ask: What’s this? It’s a dre/ jacket/skirt.Look at this skirt.What colour is it? Is it pretty? /colourful? How much is? Is it expensive/cheap/big/long/small/short? Help the Ss to answer them.Present the new words with the help of the real objects.(2) Show them the flash cards, to listen and repeat the new words: colourful, pretty, cheap, and expensive.(3) Play a game.a.I say cheap, Ss say expensive, or on the opposite.b.Cheap or expensive? Tell Ss that more than 80 is expensive, le than 79 is cheap.Put the price on the bag, pen, pencil, books, clothes, Ss see the price, then say It’s cheap/expensive.To see who can see the fastest.(4) Listen and repeat. Let Ss listen to tape recorder, repeat aloud. Then help Ss to say these following sentences: Look at that „ It’s„ I want to buy it.It’s„yuan.(5) Extension.Use the real objects to show Ss a dialogue like this: A: Can I help you? B: Yes, I ‘d like a pen.A: Look at that pen.Is it nice? B; Yes, it’s pretty.I like it How much is it? A: It’s 2 yuan. B: Oh, it’s cheap.I want buy it. A: Here you are. Get Ss to make more dialogues using the words and expreions.(5) Listen and chant in groups.4.Homework.a.Copy the key words.b. Listen and chant together.Board-writing:

Unit 5 How much is it? colourful pretty cheap expensive. It’s „ It’s.„Yuan.I want to buy it.

Period 2

Teaching Aims: 3.Be able to listen, speak, read the new words well: sixty seventy ninety-nine hundred aistant help how much that’s= that is 4.Be able to talk about the colours, price and style: That’s expensive/ colourful / pretty /cheap.How much is it? It’s „yuan.5..Be able to use the language skillfully.Important points and difficult points: 1.Listen, speak, read the key words well.2.Be able to communicate with the useful language points: Can I help you? How much is this dre/ shirt/jacket? Difficulty words: expensive pretty colourful ninety-nine Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 5.Warm –up.a.Sing a song.My clothes. b.Listen and chant with the tape. c.Listen and do.(For Unit 5) 6.Preview. Ply the tape for Ss to listen to the song of Unit 5: The Coat in the Window.7.Presentation.Let’s talk (1) Make a dialogue with an individual student.T: Hello, How much is your shirt? S.It’s thirty yuan.T: Is it expensive? S: No, but it’s pretty.(2) Look, listen and imitate.a.Look at the picture.Ask some questions.Who can you see? What does Amy want to buy? How much is it? Is it cheap? b.Watch VCD tape.Try to understand the dialogue.c.Listen to the dialogue, repeat with the tape.d.Play a game; Higher or lower? Student holds a pen up: The others try to gue the price.S1: How much is this pen? S2: It’s two yuan.S1: Higher! Higher! S3: It’s Four yuan.S1: Lower! Lower! S4: It’s three yuan.S1: Yes.(3) Group talk.Try to ask the price of their own clothes or the stationeries.Then make a survey.(4) Practice the dialogue in the real situation.(5) Act out their dialogues.8.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.Board-writing:

Unit 5 How much is it? Aistant: Can I help you? Ninety-nine Customer: Yes, I want „ sixty seventy That’s expensive/ cheap.It’s too „

Period 3

Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read the dialogue well.2.Be able to talk about the size, price and style of the things you want to buy.3.Group work: To make a survey.Ask the prices of your friends’ clothes.Important points and difficult points: 1.Listen, speak, read the key words well.2.Be able to communicate with the useful expreions.3.Try to make a dialogue about the shopping by themselves.4.Difficult sentences: How about this pair? Are they all right? Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.We’ll take them.Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 9.Warm –up.a.Let’s do.(Listen and do actions) b.Greetings and everyday English.10.Preview. Play the tape for Ss to listen to the song of Unit 5: The Coat in the Window.11.Presentation.Let’s talk (1) Make a dialogue with an individual student.T: Hello, Are you wearing a pair of sandals? S.No, I’m wearing a pair of sneakers.T: Look at my sandals.They are old.I want to buy a new pair.Let’s go shopping together.S: Good idea.(2) Look, listen and imitate.a.Look at the picture.Ask some questions.b. Watch VCD tape.Try to understand the dialogue.c.Explain the difficulties: What size? Size 5.Are they all right? We’ll take them.d.Listen to the dialogue, repeat with the tape.e.Group talk.Make a survey. To know the size.Ask; What size do you wear? I wear size 37. How much are your sandals/ sneakers/ slippers? f.Practice the dialogue in groups.g.Act out the dialogue.

h.Play a game.Gue the size of what they wear.What size do you wear? Gue.Size 5.Smaller.Size 4.i.If time permits, let Ss go to buy the things they have in groups.12.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.Board-writing:

Unit 5 How much is it? A pair of sneakers for my son.

What size? How about this pair? How much are they?

We’ll take them.

Period 4

Teaching Aims: 1.Be able to listen, speak, read and write the key words well: apple, pear, orange, banana, and watermelon.2.Be able to say and write the main sentences: How much are they? They’re three Yuan.3..Be able to use the language skillfully.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: 13.Warm –up.a.Let’s do. b.Greetings and daily report.14.Preview.a.Make a survey: Ask Ss to think of what size of shoes and clothes their family members wear.Ask them some questions. 3.Presentation.a.Show Ss the chart let them look at it carefully.Ask them questions.What does Zoom want to buy? What fruits do you know? Does Zoom want any lemons? How many apples does Zoom want? b.Ask the Ss to say something about the picture.c.Show them the cards, help Ss say: one apple, five apples, ten pears, ten oranges, and two big watermelons.d.Play a game: Show them pictures, let Ss quickly say the plural forms of the words: two apples, three bananas„ e.Listen and watch the dialogue.a) Read and practice the dialogue.g.Act out the dialogue with headdrees.h.Let Ss make their own dialogue in groups.i.Do the exercises on the activity book.15.Homework.a.Read the dialogue aloud.b.Finish the exercise in activity book.c.Copy the key sentences and words one line each.Board-writing:

Unit 5 How much is it? A fruit shop apples pears Pictures oranges bananas

Watermelons How much are they? They’re three Yuan.

Unit6单元教材分析

Teaching Contents:

Unit 6 At a farm

Teaching Aims: 1. Can listen, read, and say the main words of let’s learn.2.Can understand the commands and give correct responses.3.Can understand the main sentences and can use them in real life.Know some English proverbs.Teaching Points: Words and sentences Teaching Difficults: Four skill words Use the sentences Teaching Methods: TPR, Reading, Acting.Learning Methods：speaking, listening

Teahing Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.

Teaching Times: Four

Period 1

Teaching Aims: 2.Can listen, read, and say the main words of let’s learn.3.Can understand the commands and give correct responses.Important points and difficult points: 1.The names of the animals at a farm.2.The difference in the pronunciation of ‘horse’ and ‘house’; 3.The difference of ‘how many’ and ‘how much’ Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm-up 1.Daily English practice.What’s the weather like today? Is it warm? Oh, what a lovely day! Let’s go to the farm! Step 2.Preview 1.Let’s do.Listen to the tape, t do actions to show the meaning of the phrases.Students listen and do actions after the teacher.2.T draws some farm animals on the blackboard.Use the fast way or slow way of drawing and ask the students: Are they„? Step 3 presentation Let’s learn 1.T shows some pictures of farm animals: look at these animals.Where do they live? They live on the farm.2.Show the main poster of this unit: this is a farm.There are many animals at the farm.Look, horses, hens, sheep, cows, goats and lambs.T repeats the names of the farm animals; students can make some sounds of that kind of animal.3.T uses the word cards to teach the farm animals.a.T gives out the sound of animal with actions; students follow and say the words.b.Students practice in pairs in the same way.c.Ss work in pair.Draw and gue.4.T: what do you see in the picture? How many horses / hens /sheep /sows /goats /lambs do you see? Where are the hoses /hens /sheep / cows /goats / lambs? What are those? / What are they? 5.Practice let\'s do.6.Ss ask and answer in pairs with the student’s card.What are they? They are„.Board-writing:

Unit 6 At a farm What are they? They are„.Feed„ Sheep-sheep Ride„ Horse-horses Milk„ Hen-hens Shear...Cow-cows Hold„ Goat-goats

Period 2

Teaching Aims: 1.Can understand the main sentences and can use them in real life.2.Know some English proverbs.3.can listen, say, read, and write the four skill words.4.can understand the dialogue and can act it out.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.warm –up 1.learn the song of this unit: Mary has a little lamb 2.Gueing game: T or Ss make the sounds of animals.The others gue what animals are they.Step 2.revision 1.use picture cards to review the words about farm animals.2.let’s play T shows some parts of the picture, students gue what animals it is.See who can say out the words quickly.Then his group can get one point.3.review let’s do with actions.Step 3.presentation 1.Present the contents of A let’s talk.Ss watch the VCD about the dialogue and then answer the teacher’s questions: a.How many people are there in the dialogue? b.Who are they? c.Where are they? Are they at school? d.What can they see at the farm? e.How many cows are there at the farm? Step 4 practice 1.Listen to the dialogue and repeat after it.2.practice the dialogue in groups.3.Some groups act out the dialogue.Homework: reside the dialogue Board-writing:

Unit 6 At a farm Are they„? Yes, they are./No, they aren’t.

How many„do you have?

Period 3

Teaching Aims: 1.Can listen, say, and read the main words.2.Can read the new words after the tape.3.Can say the chant.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm –up/revision 1.Use pictures cards to review the words of farm animals.Practice in sentences: what are these/those? They are„.Are they„.? Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.2.Use picture cards and word cards to teach the new words: tomato-tomatoes, potato-potatoes, cucumber-cucumbers, an onion- onions, carrot- carrots.3.Use real objects to say: look at the „ they are„.Or: The tomatoes are red.They are juicy.The potatoes are brown.They are tasty.The carrots are orange.They are yummy.The cucumbers are green.They are tender.The onions are white.They are smelly.4.Let’s chant.Ss listen to the tape, and repeat after it.Learn the chant by listening and repeating.T can explain some new words to them.Step 3 Homework 1.Copy the new words.2.Reside the chant.Board-writing:

Unit 6 At a farm Tomato- tomatoes, juicy and red.Cucumber-cucumbers tender and green.Potato- potatoes, tasty and brown.Onion-onions, smelly and white.carrot-carrots, Yummy and orange.

Period 4

Teaching Aims: 1.Can listen, say, read and write the words and sentences in this part.2.Can read the dialogue with the help of teacher and tape.3. Can listen, say and read the main sentences: What are these/ those? Are these/ those„? And can answer them.4.Can read the dialogue with the help of the teacher and tape.Important points and difficult points: New words and sentences Teaching methods:listening,speaking Learning Methods：speaking, listening Teaching Aids: Computer, caette, caette recorder, power point, pictures, cards.Teaching Steps: Step 1.Warm- up 1.Review the words of farm animals and vegetables with the help of pictures.2.Review the main sentence patterns.3.Review the dialogues and chants of Part A and B.Step 2 presentation 1.Listen to the tape to learn the dialogue.2.Repeat after the tape.3.Practice spelling the words and sentences.Step 3 practice 1.Have a spelling game to help them to memorize the four skilled words and sentences and tell them how to write them in the same way.2.Ss practice in pair to spell the words.Step 3 Homework Copy the dialogue and the four skilled words and sentences.Board-writing:

Unit 6 At a farm Are these„?

Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.

What are these/ those?

They are„.

推荐第6篇：Module14全英教案

Module1 The Great Wall

1、Teaching preparing:

Students book：Module1Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task: A．basic object:

Key words：

thousand postcard more kilometer

Key sentences: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?

B .

To learn “thousand

kilometer

million ” C．Review: The using way of the verb „be‟ 2．

Talking about some famous places.

3、Teaching point: words： thousand

kilometer

million postcard

4、Teaching difficulty:

kilometer

thousand

million

“Tell me more about the Great Wall.“It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.”

5、Task design: words： postcard

thousand

kilometer

million

Sentences: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?”

“It‟s about six thousand seven hundred kilometers.”的句型。 B. The task:

1：AB

Unit1

exercise3 2：AB

Unit2

exercise

1、

2、

4、5

6、Teaching things Photo radio picture wordcards 第一课时:

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss

(2) Competition: List the places the visited as many as poible .

2、Leading : （1）A.watch TV T: What’s this place?

S: ( teacher writes the main structure on board as modal for other students ) It’s a picture of … B.Game : Tell me more T: It’s an animal.S1: Tell me more

T: It has long nose.

S1: It’s an elephant.

The more “Tell me more”, the le will the score be given.

3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.Where are they? c.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: postcard

thousand

kilometer

million b.The main sentences structure: “These postcards are great!” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?” (6) students practice to make sentences with the key points. Game：Paing wordcards

4、Drilling and Counselling （1）Finish the exercise one (2) Pairwork

5、Teaching handwriting: “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about ……”

三.课后反思:

这堂课主要讲了各个国家的一些名胜古迹,通过让孩子描述图片的内容来掌握所学的句型.锻炼他们的口头表达能力,再让他们自己带一些图片,同桌之间相互对图片进行描述,加深对所学知识的记忆.单词的掌握还欠缺一点.

第二课时

Step1.Tell students a joke and give them a riddle to fun.

Step2.Review the words: postcard

thousand

kilometer

million

Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles.

Step4.Teacher explain the using way of “million” “thousand”: teacher give numbers, students tells “~ thousand” or “~ million”.

6,000,000

34,000

12,000,000

Step5.Homework: a.word dictation b.recite paragraph one c.Students make role play about unit one.

第三课时

Step1.a.Student make role play.

b.Give words dictation.

c.Open Activity Book.

Step2.Do exercise 1.a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.Students read the questions.c.Teacher gives help, students finish the question.

Step3.Do exercise 2.Listen, ask and answer.

a.Play the tape a second time, pauses it after each second . T: What are they? S: They are cars, trees.….b.Work in pairs, ask and answer.

Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets,students fill the blank

第2单元教案 New York is in the east of America.

1Teaching preparing: Student‟s book：Module1Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task: A．Basic objects: Key words：Mexico

Canada Key sentences: “It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”

“Tell me more about the Great Wall.” “How long is it?” B．Review: The using way of verb „be‟

2．Making student know about famous places.Talking about some basic facts of a country or a place，and learn to use direction words：It‟s in the north / south / west / east of

3、Teaching point: words：

Mexico

Canada

San Francisco

New York

4、Teaching difficulty: How to pronounce “Mexico” “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.”

5、Task design Learning task: Review words：thousand

kilometer postcard

million

To learn vocabulary：San Francisco

New York Mexico

Canada

Learning “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about the Great Wall.”

“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…” “It‟s about six thousand seven hundred kilometers.”

6、Teaching things

Radio

wordcards

photo

picture

第四课时

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss (2) Pointing game: Teacher gives students four cards “north / south / west / east”, let students put them around the claroom.T: North.S: Students point to the north

2、（Leading ）（1）A.Watch PPT T: What‟s this place? S: It‟s a picture of America.Students learn to read Mexico

Canada

San Francisco

New York B.a.Game : Pointing game ( Students open the book, look at activity 1 ) T: Mexico.S: Students point to the south of the map.c.Listen to the tape, and point to the places on the map.C.Lead in

1) Student list Chinese famous cities, teacher write them on the black board.

2) Teacher write the main structure on the board: “Tell me more about the …...” “Where is it?”

“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”

“How long / big is it?”

3) Students practice with partner

3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.

4、（Drilling and Counselling） Learn the chant: a.What can you see? b.What can you see on the flag?

Teacher introduce history of American flag.c.Students listen to the tape.e.Students repeat 5．Teacher‟s handwriting： “It‟s a picture of the Great Wall.” “Tell me more about ……”

“It‟s in the north / south / west / east of China/ America…”

三.课后反思

第五课时

Step1 Warm up: Do the chant “America”

Play a game：“What am I?”

Rules: Students can do 1~2 actions.1 action got a star, 2 actions got 2 stars.

The le actions , the more stars will be given.

Step2 Do activity 3.a.Listen to the tape.b.Listen again, students claps hands, they can clap harder when hear the streed words.c.Students repeat

Step3 Do activity book Activity 1 a.T: what can you see?

S: I saw….

b.Ss read the words after teacher.c.Play the tape, students write the answer.Activity 2 a.Ss read the places with teacher‟s help.b.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help.

Step4 Homework 1.Do exercise 3 2.words dictation.

课后反思：

课本中出现了东南西北方位词,虽然不是重点,但还是应该拿出来给孩子们复习复习.通过对这个模块的一个小测验,发现孩子们对基本知识的掌握不够扎实.

《英语》六年级第七册第2模块

第1单元教案 Chinatown in America

1Teaching preparing

Students‟ book：Module2 Unit 1 Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task 2．Basic task Key words：mi

sometimes

restaurant

really Key sentences“There‟s a Chinatown in New York!” “There are lots of Chinese shops and restaurants there”.B know about “lots of”

C．Review:

The using way of the verb „There be‟ 2．To describe places

3、Teaching point:

dancing

words：

sometimes

restaurant

really

4 Teaching difficulty How to pronounce words „sometimes

restaurant‟ To learn the structure “There be”

5、Task design A.Learning task Key words： mi

sometimes

restaurant

really

dancing

Key structure: “There‟s a Chinatown in New York!”

“There are lots of Chinese shops and restaurants there”.B.:Task 1：AB Unit1 exercise3

2：AB Unit 2 exercise

1、

2、

4、5

3: Play a game: Students should prepare a piece of paper

第一课时

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss

(a.) Student talk about there weekend: T: I bought some fruits, can you gue What did I buy? S：Did you buy…..2 Leading （1）A.Teacher show a peach(card) on the blackboard, “What can you see?” S: A peach.Teacher help the students say: There is a peach.(b.) Students make sentences with “ There is a …..”

(c.) Teacher show two peaches and teach “ There are … (n+s/es)” (d.) Students make sentences with “ There are … (n+s/es)” Watch POWERPOINT T: What‟s this place?

S: ( teacher writes the main structure on board as modal for other students ) There is/are ….in/on….B.Game : The Six boxes

a.Students draw six big boxes on a piece of paper.b.Tell them to number the boxes „1—6‟ c.Teacher ells what to draw in the boxes: In box 1 there is a pen.In box 2 there are two erasers.In box 3 there is an apple.In box…… C.Lead in

1)T: I describe a place, you gue.if you don‟t know, you ask “ tell me more!” students gue out it‟s Chinatown, teacher Show PPT about Chinatown.

2) Ask students to describe with sentence structure “There be” given on the blackboard.

3、Presentation (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures c.Who are they? d.Where are they? c.What are they doing? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: mi

sometimes

restaurant

really

dancing

b.“ There is a …..”

“ There are … (n+s/es)”

(6) students practice to make sentences with the key points. Game：paing wordcards

make sentences

4、Drilling and Counselling （1）Finishing activity book exercise 3. (2) Students help each other.

5、(Task-fulfilling) Gueing game：”Where do you go on weekend?” 6．Teachers handwriting:

There

( n )

There

are

( ns/es)

第二课时

Step1.Tell students a joke and give them a riddle to fun.

Step2.Review the words: mi

sometimes

restaurant

really

dancing

Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles

Step4.Game a.Revise „north‟ „south‟ „west‟ „east‟ with the students.b.Tell the students to draw a big circle on a piece of paper.( tell them that the circle is an island and that you are going to describe the contents the island and and they have to draw the objects in the correct places.c.T: (draw a large island on your paper) In the north there is a river.In the south there are two mountains.In the west there are some trees.In the east there is a house.

Step5.Homework: d.word dictation e.recite paragraph one f.Students make role play about unit one.

Step6.课后反思

第三课时

Step1.a.Student make role play.

b.Give words dictation.

c.Open Activity Book.

Step2.Do exercise 1.a.Play the recording again, then encourage them to tell the important things in the story.b.For each question invite a student to come to the blackboard and write the sentence.

Step3.Do exercise 4.Look at the pictures.Write sentences.

a.students draw things that they know how to say in English and be similar to the ones in the book.b.Collect all the pictures from the cla.c.Students A and B, give A a picture , A describe the picture and B draw it .d.Show the picture, if student B draws the same object, he/she gets a point.

Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets,students fill the blank

第2单元教案

Postcards from China

Teaching preparing 1 .Teaching task Students book：Module2Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3 Teaching objects 2．

A．Basic task Key words：

bicycle mountain lake square Key sentences: “There are lots of bicycles in China” “There is a very famous river” B．Review:

The using way of the verb „There be‟

2．Use the structure to introduce famous places

For example: learn to use „There be‟

to describe some basic facts of a country or a place

3、Teaching point: Key words： bicycle mountain lake square

4、Teaching difficulty: How to pronounce‟ square.‟ How to use „there be‟

5、Task design: Learning task: Review words： mi

sometimes

restaurant

really

dancing

To learn words： bicycle

mountain

lake square

To learn “There are lots of bicycles in China” “There is a very famous river”

6、Teaching things: radio photo wordcards picture 7．课后反思

第二课时

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss (2) Chant” America”

(3) Play a game to review the structure.

2、Leading : （1）A.Watch PPT T: What‟s this place?

S: It‟s a picture of the Changjiang River .

The Tian‟anmen Square .

The West Lake .

The Huangshan Mountain

The Great Wall.a.Students learn to read them.b.Student describe them with “There is/are…..” B.Lead in

a.) Listen to the tape, and number the places.b.) Students repeat after the tape sentence by sentence.c.) Students try to recite the paragraph with teacher‟s help, the students who have tried will get a sticker. 3) Students practice with partner 3 Presentation: (1)Ss do exercise 2 Now point and say (2)Ss do exercise 3 Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…

4、Drilling and Counselling Learn the song: “There‟s a Great Wall in China” a.Students listen to the tape.b.Students repeat

三.课后反思:

第五课时

Step1 Warm up:

Sing the song: “There‟s a Great Wall in China”

Play a game：“Memory”

Rules: a.Students are divided into boys group and girls group.b.Give them limited time to memory the pictures, then they close the book.c.Students describe the objects in their memory, the more correct object they give, the more scores they will gain.

Step2 Do activity book Activity 1 Listen and number.

a.T: what can you see?

S: I can see there is/are…( Students try to describe the pictures) b.Teacher describe the pictures, students number.

Step3

Activity 4 Look and complete the postcard.c.Ss draw the places with teacher‟s describing.d.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help.

Step4 Homework 1 Do exercise 3 2 words dictation.

课后反思：

由于学生个体差异的不同,课堂上的内容对有些孩子比较容易,而对个别学生来说有很难,甚至不能听懂.但我是不会让一个孩子落后的.六年级的内容也增加了,教学内容就要做合理的调整和补充,同时根据学生的心理特点,有区别有重点的调整才行.《英语》六年级第七册第3模块

第1单元教案 Collecting stamp is my hobby

Teaching preparing: 1. Students book：Module3Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3 Teaching task: 2． Knowledge : A．Basic task: Key words：another collect

stamp

hobby

men

Key sentences: “I‟ve got lots of stamps.”

“These are some stamps from Canada ”.“ This stamp is from China”

B . Review:

The using way of „be from‟ 2． Make students talk about hobbies.

3、Teaching point: Key words：

collect

stamp

hobby

men

women

another

4、Teaching difficulty: A.； men and man B ; collect

5、Task design: A. Learning task:

To learn words： collect

stamp

hobby

men

women

another To learn the structure: “I‟ve got lots of stamps.”

“These are some stamps from Canada ”.“This stamp is from China” B. To use the task: 1：AB Unit1 exercise 3 2：AB Unit2 exercise

1、

2、

4、5 3：You do action and I gue .4 : “Your hobby is doing….”

第一课时

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss Ss—Ss

(2) Game: you do action and I gue .(3)Write down the sentence: Your hobby is doing sth Exercise “Your hobby is….(3) Free talk: Student talk about their hobbies: T: My hobby is reading books, what‟s your hobby?(My hobby is doing sth) S：My hobby is …..

2、Leading :

（1）A.ask “What can you see? What‟s this? ” S: It‟s a stamp.T: What are these? S: These are some stamps.How to use :a stamp

and some stamps Teacher help the students say: This stamp is from….

(b.) Students watch PPT and make sentences with “This stamp is from….” “These stamps are from…”

(c.) Teacher shows some stamps and teach “These stamps are from…”

(d.) Students make sentences with “These stamps are from…” B.Game : Gueing game Students watch PPT

T: What‟s are these? S: These are stamps.Teacher give numbers to each stamp, then describe the picture of one of them, Students gue which number it is.T: This one has got a… on it.S: Number 3.Then reverse.C.Lead in T: Everyone has hobby, now listen to the tape , find out what Simon‟s hobby is.

3、（Presentation） (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures e.What‟s Simon‟s hobby? f.Where are the stamps from? c.Has Simon got any stamps from China? Student answer the questions.(2) listen to the tape (3) repeat after the tape.(4) Teacher explain the text and student practice the key points.a.The key points: collect

stamp

hobby

men

women

another b.Students practice to make sentences with the key points. c.Game：Paing wordcards make sentences

4、（Drilling and Counselling）（1）Finish SB U1 exercise3. (2) Pairwork.

6．Teaching handwriting：

“This stamp is from….” “These stamps are from…”

三.课后反思:

第二课时

Step1.Game: Extend the sentence T: I‟ve got lots of apples.

S1: I‟ve got lots of apples and bananas.S2: I‟ve got lots of apples, bananas and pears .

…….

Step2.Review the words: collect

stamp

hobby

men

women

another

Step3.Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles

Step4.Talk about stamps (SB book activity 3) a.Number those stamps.b.Teacher describe one of the stamp with the main sentence structure given on the blackboard: “This stamp is from….”.“It has got …..on it”.

Step5 Homework: g.word dictation h.recite paragraph one i.Students make role play about unit one.

Step6.课后反思

第三课时

Step1.a.Students make role play.

b.Give words dictation.

c.Open Activity Book.

Step2.Do exercise 1.e.Play the recording again, then encourage them to tell the important things in the story.f.Then, tell them to read the sentences in the exercise and decide if they are „True‟, „False‟ or „Don‟t know‟.( Explain that they should tick „Don‟t know‟ if the answer is not found in the dialogue.)

Step3.Do exercise 2.Now correct the false statements.Student A read the first false statement in Exercise1.Student B corrects.

Step4.Do exercise 3 Complete the dialogues a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.b.According to the pictures and words in the brackets, students fill the blank

Step5.课后反思

第2单元教案

I’ve got a hobby

Teaching preparing:

2、Studends book：Module2Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task: 2．Basic task:

To learn to speak the structure: “Have you got any dolls from Japan ” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t” B．Review: Grammer 2．Talking about your hobbies.

3、Teaching difficulty: any/some

5、Task design: Review words： collect

stamp

hobby

men

women

another To learn “Have you got any dolls from Japan ” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t”

6、Teaching things: Radio

photo

picture

wordcards 第四课时

1、Warm up ⑴ Musical game “What‟s your hobby?” “ My hobby is doing sth” (3) Watch PPT T: Students please watch PPT, What are these?

Can you gue what Mi Ma‟s hobby is? S: Your hobby is flying kites.( PPT explains some kites and any kites) T: Yes, have you got any kites? “Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t” 2Leading : （1）A.Ask and answer T: Have you got any books? S1: Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t.Have you got any ….s? S2: Yes, I have/ No, I haven‟t.Have you got any ….s? B.Practice a.) Go through all the pictures with the students to make sure that they know the vocabulary.2) Teacher write the main structure on the board: “Have you got any…..” “Yes, I have./ No, I haven‟t” 3) Students practice with partner

3、Presentation: Ss do exercise 3 Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…

4、Drilling and Counselling Learn the chant: “HOBBY” a.Students listen to the tape.b.Students repeat

第五课时(REVIEW) Step1 Warm up:

Sing the song: “HOBBY”

Step2 Do activity book Activity 1 Listen and answer the questions.

Step3

Activity 3 Answer the questions.a.Students complete the questions according to their own situation.b.Students work in pairs:

A keeps the book open and asks questions B closes his book and answer A‟s questions.c.They exchange the roles.

Step4 Homework e.Do exercise 3 f.words dictation.

课后反思：

本单元的内容涉及到 my hobby(我的爱好),让孩子准备的课堂用具孩子没能做充分的准备.因此在课堂上孩子们谈论说的时间就缩短了.另外重点句型的操练,孩子们也很快的领会了.Module Four Happy Thanksgiving !

Teaching preparin 1． Student book：Module1Unit 1Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task: 2．Basic task: Key words： festival

special

meal

sound Key sentences:

“What do you do on …..”

“Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.”

“We say „thank-you‟ for our food, family and friends.”

C．Review: “Can you tell me more about…..”and“… is my …”

3、Teaching point: Words ： festival

special

meal

sound

4、Teaching difficulty festival sound “Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.” “We always have a special meal.”

5、Task design:

To learn words ：festival

special

meal

sound

To learn sentences: “What do you do on …..” “Thanksgiving is my favorite festival.” “We always have a special meal.”

“We say „thank-you‟ for our food, family and friends.”

1：SB Unit 1 exercise

2、3

2: AB Unit 1exercise

1、

2、

3、

4、5

6、Teaching things radio photo wordcards picture

第一课时

1、Warm up ⑴ Sing a song “We wish you a merry Christmas.” Competition: List festivals as many as poible.2 Leading : （1）a.（Watch PPT— pictures about Chinese festivals） Ask questions: “what is this festival?”

“What do we do at that festival?” b.Then show the PPT of main sentence structures: “… is my favorite festival, we always do (something)”

Students look at pictures and talk about festivals in pairs with the main structures offered.c.Students show there ideas with their partner.B.Lead in

1) T: You know much about Chinese festival, how many western festival do you know? Students list the western festivals .

T: Very nice! Today Simon will tell us more about American festival, listen to the tape and later you must tell me about them.

3、Presentation: (1)S open their books Question: Look at the pictures a.Who are they? b.What can you see? Students answer the questions.(2) Give the questions: “What are the two American festivals in the story?” “What do people do on Flag Day?” “What do people do on Thanksgiving Day?” (3) Answer the questions.

4、Drilling and Counselling （1） Game: Gueing(T vs Ss) a.Prepare three word cards: Thanksgiving Day

Flag Day

Christmas Day b.Teach them to read.c.Teacher describes the activities that people do in different festival.T: You can see Christmas trees.Ss: Christmas Day 6.Homework： a.Write the new words.b.Collect Chinese and American festival information.

第二课时

Step1.Game: Gueing (Ss1 vs Ss2):

Repeat the text after the tape, then students practice with partner in roles.

Step2 Discuion

Step3.Students make role plays about western festivals with their partner. Step4.Homework: a.word dictation b.recite paragraph two

: 第三课时

Step1.Give words dictation

Step2.Open Activity Book, do exercise 1: Listen to the story again and tick or cro.a.Students read the questions.b.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.c.Teacher gives help, students finish the question.d.Play the tape, students finish the exercise.

Step3.Do exercise3.Complete the table.a.Review “ I,

me,

we,

our” b.Complete the table

Step4.Do exercise

5 Write about Spring Festival.a.Students look at pictures, tell what they can see on it.Students describe.Ss: Watch TV Talk with each other.Play games.

Leon four

What’s your favorite festival?

1、Teaching preparing:

Teaching task: Student book： Module1Unit 2Activity1, 2, 3

2、Teaching task ：

Basic task:

Key words：lantern

race

moon cake

Key sentences: “What‟s your favorite festival?”

“My favorite festival is ……” 3

Teaching point: ：

Lantern Festival

Spring Festival

Mid-Autumn Festival Dragon Boat Festival

race

moon cake “What‟s your favorite festival?”

“My favorite festival is ……”

4、Teaching : lantern, moon

5、Task design: To learn words ：

festival

special

meal

sound To learn sentences： Lantern Festival

Spring Festival

Mid-Autumn Festival

Dragon Boat Festival

race

moon cake

二、

1、Warm up ⑴Greetings: T—Ss

Ss—Ss (2)Do the chant, review “I, me, we, our” (3)Play a matching game:

Thanksgiving Day

Sing flag song

Flag Day

Receive presents

Christmas Day

Cheat each other

Ask volunteers to finish the matching.(4)Ask students to add more activities.

2、导入（Leading ）（1）A.1Watch PPT

T: What‟s this festival? S: It‟s ……

Students learn to read Lantern Festival

Spring Festival

Mid-Autumn Festival

Dragon Boat Festival B.Game: Gueing game

T: (mimes rowing a boat) S: Is it Dragon Boat Festival? T: Right! b.Students do practice in pairs: choose a festival, ask and gue.

3、Presentation: (1)S open their books (2) listen to the tape

(3) Replay sentence by sentence (4) Students repeat after each sentence.(5) Students try to recite one of the festival.

4、Drilling and Counselling StudentA chooses a festival, studentB asks and if he or she can‟t gue out, he can ask “Tell me more.” unle he got the answer. 第五课时

Step1 Warm up: Play a game：“Sentence paing”

Rules: Students ask and answer one to the next to review:

“What‟s your favorite festival?”“My favorite festival is ……”

Step2 Do activity 3.Listen and repeat, pay attention to the stre.a.Play the tape and pause after the first sentence.b.Repeat the activity with various actions, e.g., standing up, waving arms…

Step3 Do Activity Book Activity 1 Listen and complete the sentences.a.T show many pictures, if they like the picture they stand up and teacher count: “X students like…”; if they don‟t like they remain seated.

a.Ss read the questions with teacher‟s help.b.Ss write sentences, teacher offers help

Homework 1.Do exercise 4 2.words dictation. 课后反思：

通过对本单元的小测验,孩子们对这节课的知识掌握的还不错.孩子们也已经知道了外国节日和中国节日不同.有的孩子上网查了许多关于节日的资料,在班里和其他的孩子一起分享.

推荐第7篇：初中英语全英教案

A teaching plan

教材分析学情分析 Contents: 1.Vocabulary： 2.Structure: 3.Dialogue: 4.listening: Objectives:

1.Teaching Aims and Demands (1) Instructional Objectives

Be able to use the new words and phrases:

(2) Ability Objectives Be able to use listening skills to comprehend their dialogues, such as listen for specific information etc.

Be able to use what they learned to describe what they can do and give responses.Be able to use the language they learned to finish a dialogue and a short paage.

(3)Educational Objectives

Arousing students’ interest and helping them learn by using pictures.

Building their confidence by step by step approach and careful scaffolding.2.Teaching Importance To master the key vocabulary

To understand and use the target language To master the usage of the different forms of “can” in the target language.3.Teaching Difficulties To enable the students to understand the sentence patterns to talk about the ability activities.

To enable the students to use the target language

The students learned the structure “can do sth”, So it’s difficult and important to let them understand it can also be used to talk about the ability activities.

4.Teaching Aids Multi-media computer, Tape recorder and so on. 5.The Teaching Methods (1) Communicative teaching method. (2) Audio-visual teaching method. (3)Task-based teaching method.6.Studying Ways (1)Let the Ss pa \"Observation—Imitation—Practice\" to study language.(2)Let the Ss pay attention to the key information in listening practice.(3)Enable the Ss to study English language by Communication.(4)Let the Ss know that conclusions and being good at thinking are neceary to learn English well.

Procedures and Time Allotment: 2 Task1: Warming-up(2mins) Before cla, get Ss to enjoy an English song for about 2 minutes to warm them up.The purpose of the task-based activities is to Interest the students Task 2:Lead-in(3mins) 1.Use the PPT to lead in the new leon..show some pictures and teach the words and phrases: 2.ask Ss read the words together.Task3: Play a game(4mins) Task 4: Presentation(8mins) The purpose of the task-based activities is to let the students learn to cooperate with each other and practice the language points, improve the students’ abilities of speaking.Task5: Representations(5mins) Task 6.Listening(5mins) 1.Ask Ss to open their books and turn to Page 59.Look at part 1b, look at the conversations and make sure the students understand the conversations and what to do.Then play the tape for three times.For the first time the students only listen to understand the whole general meaning of the conversations.For the second time the Ss pay attention to the activity in each conversation and write them in the blanks.For the third time the Ss pay attention to the time that the activities in each conversation are done and number the conversations (1-3).Ask some Ss to check their answers.

2.Practice the conversations in 1b.Then make your own 3 conversations.The purpose of the task-based activities is to practice listening and improve the students’ abilities of listening.Task 7 .Make a survey(7mins)

Give the students several minutes to prepare the survey using the target language to ask and answer, next fill the form : Finally ask two groups of the students to report their results.For example: Task 8. Summary(4 mins) Summarize the key language points in groups , and show them on the screen to help the Ss take notes.Task 9. Homework(2mins) 1.Consolidate and review the expreions of the leon.2.Write a short paage about the results of the survey.

Blackboard design

推荐第8篇：高中英语全英教案

高中英语教案

I. Teaching focus

1.Realize the damage caused to the world and figure out the reasons.

2.Find ways to stop the earth from being polluted by discuing in groups.

II.Teaching approaches Elicitation, Mutual Interaction

III.Teaching aid Interactive multimedia teaching

IV.Teaching proce

Step 1

Revision 1. Check note-making

Earth: not enough rain, too many cattle, cutting down trees, strong winds Air: smoke from factories, power stations, cars, chemical rain, accidents at power stations and factories Water: waste from factories and cities

Step 2

Presentation

1． Present a series of images depicting the natural beauty of the earth, then the pollution.Highlight the sharp contrast between them.Guide the students to the conclusion: The earth used to be much more beautiful than now; the earth is in danger due to the increasing pollution.

2． Study the map on the textbook, then scan the paages to figure out where on the world atlas the damage has happened.Encourage the students to give out their point of view toward the pollution iue.

Step 3

Audiovisual Learning

The students watch a video on the text, then do the following true or false questions.

Many parts of the world with large population and plenty of crops have become deserts.

T 2. Land may become poor if farmers do not limit the numbers of their cattle.

T 3. Good soil is gradually lost these days as trees are being cut down.

T 4. Air pollution and water pollution are the two causes of the problem that many parts of the world have become deserts.

F 5. Chemicals in the smoke from power stations can travel hundreds of miles in the wind before falling down to the ground in the rain.

F 6. After a bad accident at a nuclear power station, 50% of the trees in Germany were damaged.F 7. The writer to explain how water is polluted uses the examples of the accidents in both India and Ruian.

F 8. Once oceans are polluted, they are not able to clean themselves. F

Step 4

Intensive Reading Read the paages again for some detailed information 1.

To say something about the damage that is caused to the world by pollution, using the information from the text.Try to present poible ways to help solve the problems. Phenomena Causes Suggestions

EARTH The area of desert is growing every year. Cattle eat gra. Limit the number of the cattle.Good soil is gradually lost. Trees being cut down; strong winds blowing the valuable soil away.Plant more trees and try to protect them.

AIR

Air is being polluted. Factories, power stations and cars produce a lot of waste. A lot of things have to be done to reduce pollution.New laws should be paed and people should realize how serious the problem is.

A lot of people died from polluted air in both Ruia and India. There were serious accidents that polluted the air.Trees in the forest are destroyed and fish in the lakes are killed.

Chemical rain.

WATER In some places it’s no longer safe for swimming, nor is it safe to eat the fish.

Factories and cities produce a lot of waste.

Same as above.

Lake Baikal, which used to be cleanest I the world, s now polluted. Waste produced from a chemical factory.2.to summarize the text by giving the main idea of each paage.Earth:

The area of desert is growing and good soil is gradually lost.Air:

Chemicals in the smoke cause a lot of damage and serious accidents took place from time to time.Water: Water pollution is caused by man’s waste. The waters of this great lake have been dirtied and 4800 square km of ocean were polluted by oil. Step 5

Discuion Appoint one student to host the discuion.The rest of the cla fall into groups of 4, changing ideas on the following question.

(1)What kind of pollution can you think of? (2)Why trees are important? (3)What are the causes of water pollution? (4) What can be done to stop land from becoming into desert? (5) What else do we know about the problems that the earth is facing? (6) What steps should we take to save the earth? Step

Role play

The students take turns to play the role of a newspaper reporter, making interviews with heads of factories (e.g.A papermaking factory) which are seriously polluting air and/or water.Record the interviews and compose a report.

Step

7 Aignment （1）Read the additional materials about pollution and do the reading comprehension exercises.

（2）Finish the report.

Thanks for attending this cla!

_____________________________________________________________________________--__

资料

我国环境污染现状令人担忧

据专家估计，中国每年因环境污染造成的损失达到二千八百三十亿元人民币，其中，仅水污染一项，估计一年造成经济损失约五百亿元。

据香港《东方日报》报导，自六十年代至今，中国有环境监测的四百三十二条大小河流中，八成受到不同程度的水体污染，其中大江河经过城镇河段的占二成，支流受污染的占六成，全中国二千八百多个湖泊，凡能接纳城镇污水的，大多出现水体负氧化现象。由于地下水过度开采，京津沪大面积出现土地沉降一点五公尺至二公尺，桂林溶岩区三十米地下水重金属超标十至二十倍。

大气污染造成的经济损失约为二百亿元，由于城市燃煤、工厂排放废气及汽车死气污染，大气中二氧化硫、一氧化碳等有毒悬浮微粒弥漫在城市上空，空气污染导致许多城市肺癌死亡率增至万分之二，全国酸雨覆盖面积已达百分之三十，所有这些损失加起来也等于二百亿元。

而生态环境破坏和自然灾害造成的损失估计高达二千亿元，森林覆盖率由四九年的三成左右，现已下降至不足一成四，草原的严重退化，水土流失面积达一百五十五万平方公里，占国土面积的百分之十六。

同时，城镇建设却仍以每年侵占一百五十万公顷土地的速度发展，破坏自然生态平衡，加上自然灾害带来的损失，每年至少损失二百亿元。

其他污染如固体废物排放、噪音污染等造成的损失也高达一百三十亿元。

专家分析表示，造成环境污染引起的经济损失原因众多，但国家工业规划布局失误，调控措施不力和公民环保意识不强是主要原因。

我的体会；

学习了该教案后，我总结体会两点。

一、该教案在教学设计上非常注重学生能力的培养，充分利用教材和多媒体手段逐步引导学生理解课文，并能进一步升华课文的主题，使学生受到心灵的启迪和道德的震撼。一切都水到渠成。

二、教案所附资料可在课堂中充分被学生利用，使他们的讨论言之有据，会使他们更乐于知识的学习和掌握。这点可以作为我今后很好的借鉴

推荐第9篇：接力版三年级上册教案

Leon

本课是本册教材的起始单元，因此教学内容安排了打招呼和自我介绍的表达方法Hellos I'm Lingling.以及简单询问和回答姓名的表达方法Ann? Yes./No.

板块一Look, listen and say学习打招呼，功能句为Hello,...

板块二Listen and say学习自我介绍，功能句为I am.二

板块三Listen and gue通过游戏听一听、猜一猜人物的名字，学会用人名加升调的语气进行询问，并学会用Yes./No.做出回答。

板块一在语境中呈现词汇和句型，板块二进一步巩固板块一并在此基础上引出新句型，板块三滚动复现前两个板块所学的名词并呈现新语言，为第2课的学习做好铺垫。

1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读单词hello和Tom, Ann, Lingling, John, Peter这5个人物的名字。

(2)能听懂、会说主要句型I am...

2.能力目标

(D能准确模仿本课录音中的内容。 (2)能用英语打招呼、问候井做自我介绍。 3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(l)渗透礼仪教育，初步培养学生乐于用英语向别人打招呼的习‘r} o

板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块旨在帮助学生学会如何用英语进行简单问候。设计图文并茂、情境 :,} ofc ,}.ra- ,e ,A: } on ate }v甲__

FnA。。

W F粕打招呼

da打招呼用语“H ello"引

清晰，学生很容易观察到Tom和Ann在且}}#T}}}f。田钊俏uy-hy cn’‘、“一‘’ 人新课自然顺畅，并且Tom和Ann是本教材的主人公，贯穿全书始终。这样的开篇既可使学生对本册的人物有一个初步的了解，又拉近了学生与教材的距离。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:本课主要人物的头饰、录音机、磁带或光盘、多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①由教师向学生打招呼“Hello!”人手，然后通过师与生、生与生等形式的交流，让学生快速进人课堂学习的情境。

②让学生看着课本，通过看一看、听一听，整体感知本板块的对话，并且跟着录音读一读。认识该板块中的人物Tom和Ann a

③让学生分角色扮演或朗读。本板块有两个角色，可以分男女生进行角色扮演或朗读，也可以同位配合进行对话表演。

(2)活动设计建议。

①歌曲歌谣。

教师可以在教学或操练语言时适当加人简单的歌曲歌谣，让学生进行有变

化的操练。教师也可以选择简单、上口、熟悉的曲子，用本板块的句yu自己创编歌曲歌谣。具体歌曲可参考本课资源库。

②角色扮演。

为学生准备本板块人物的头饰，让学生进行角色扮演。教师可随机请几组学生上台表演对话。板块二

Listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块是本课的新授部分。课文画面呈现了在新学期开学的英语课上.学

生之间学着用英语打招呼并进行自我介绍的场景，在此场景中引出本课的功能

句I am...，并将单一的姓名介绍放到句型的框架中，显得自然顺畅。这样的教

学内容贴近学生实际，容易引起学生共鸣。本板块还要求学生互相问候时增加

适当的动作和手势，让学生积极参与到对话表演之中，提高学习英语的兴趣。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:本课主要人物的头饰、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件

(2)学生准备:自己的名字卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师走进教室跟学生互相打招呼:Hello,boys and girls(Mi/Mr二)!

②教师走到学生中间，打招呼并自我介绍:Hello! I am Mi/Mr二通过这

种和学生实际学习生活相关的问候，自然而然地将学生带入英语学习的情境中。

③播放课文录音，让学生跟着读一读。教师应特别重视学生模仿录音跟读文本，为学生学习新知识打下良好基础。

④让学生跟录音读两到三遍之后，在小组内进行角色扮演，充分练习，然后随机选择几个小组到讲台前表演。

(2)活动设计建议。

①通过挂图或课件为学生呈现本课内容，让学生看一看、听一听。可以分层呈现课文，如第一次让学生听一听新同学之间是怎样打招呼的，第二次让学生跟着文本中的问候语结合动作展示一下。

②游戏:掷色子。

用卡纸做一个正方体，在每个面上分别写上英文名字Tom, Ann. John, Peter二及句型Iam„组内同学轮流掷色子，根据朝上一面的名字来说Iam...如抽到I am„时，则要介绍自己的英文名这个游戏可供小组活动时用。

③游戏:找朋友。

让一名学生离开座位找自己想找的朋友‘根据对方名字卡片提示打招呼并自我介绍Hello，二Iam„然后坐在朋友的位子上，这位朋友离开座位继续寻找下一个朋友

板块三{Listen and gue

1.设计意图

板块三是本课的巩固拓展环节。通过设计听一听、猜一猜的游戏场景，让学生

学习用人名加升调的语气进行简单的提问，并根据实际情况用Yes.或No.回答。

这样的猜谜活动符合三年级学生的年龄特点，容易集中学生的注意力，提高学生的

学习兴趣。

2.课前准备

教师准备:本板块中出现的人物头饰或名字卡片、眼罩、录音机和磁带、光盘

和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

①播放本课录音，让学生先看一看、听一听，了解本板块的游戏内容，然后跟录音读一读。教师注意指导学生模仿发音，尤其是模仿文中疑问句的语调。

②请个别学生起来分角色读一读课文对话，鼓励学生模仿录音中的语音语调。

③请几名学生上台，分别戴上游戏中人物的头饰或名字卡片。然后选择一名学生戴上眼罩听声音猜测。被猜的同学根据猜测结果回答Yes./No, I am...

(2)活动设计建议。

①根据本课内容进行小组活动，4至6人一组，其中一人遮住眼睛，其他人扮演文中的角色向他打招呼，让该生猜一猜跟他打招呼的人是谁。

②小组拓展活动。采用活动①的形式进行，但是内容换成学生的英文名。

Leon

学生在第1课已经学过打招呼和自我介绍，本课继续学习问候及道别用语 Good morning.Goodbye.以及人物称谓Dad, Mum, Mio

板块一Look, listen and say学习问候及道别用语，功能句为Good morning.和Goodbye.

板块二Look and say学习在一定的情境中使用问候语，并学习对教师的称呼，如Mi Li o

板块三Listen and sing通过学习歌曲“Good Morning"，巩固问候语。

板块一在语境中呈现词汇和句型，板块二和板块三滚动复现板块一所学的词汇和句型，并进一步对其进行巩固和运用。

1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读Dad, Mum, Mi这3个单词。

(2)能听懂、会说主要句型Good morning, Dad. Goodbye, Mum. Good morning, Mi Li.

(3)学唱歌曲“Good Morning" o

2.能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(7)能在实际情境中运用Good morning.与别人互问早安，用(}ooclbye.与别人道别

3情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

培养学生主动用英语向别人问候和道别的习惯。板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块情景图清晰地展现了小主人公Ann早餐时与父亲问候，餐后与母亲道别的场景。通过这种贴近学生生活的场景自然而然地呈现了语言运用的情境，容易引起学生的共鸣，易于帮助学生理解问候语Good morning, Dad.以及道别语Goodbye, Mum.本板块旨在帮助学生学会如何向他人问候及道别。

2，课前准备

教师准备:本课主要人物的头饰、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1>板块内容教学建议。

①师生互相打招呼Hello,„通过师与生、生与生等形式的交流，让学生快速进人课堂学习的情境，然后以一首歌曲“Finger Family'，作为课前热身。

Finger Family

1=D普、名词曲十旧扭扭比扭比皿几一鱼已{6

1{5

l ?U Ou lyo y 1.Daddy

finger, daddy

finger

where are 5

5 am here

5 here.3 How 2.Mummy 3.Brother 4.Sister 5.Baby

②通过看一看、听一听。a学’I .}}体1L}21知本板块的对话，初步理解GOOd moc-ning.1}ad·和Goodbye .Mum·的含义，Jp!I.模仿录音的语音语调读一读。

③分角色朗读对话。本板块有沸个角色，，，「以分3个组进行角色扮演或朗读:也可以3人一组，分小组活动。

①歌曲歌谣。

本板块可以适当加人简一单的歌曲歌l，对句型进行有变化的操练。教师也可以选择简单、上口和熟悉的曲子，用本板块的句型自己编写歌曲歌谣。

②连锁应答。

由教师开始，选择一名学生进行问候:Good morning,...学生回答:Good morning, Mi„教师结束对话:Goodbye,„学生应答之后自由选择另一名学生进行此问候，以此类推。

③教师发给学生人物头饰，学生分角色表演对话。板块二

Look and say

1.设计意图

板块二是板块一的顺接，按照时间顺序呈现了小主人公Ann早饭后离开家到学校与同学、老师打招呼的场景。该部分图文并茂、情境清晰，真实地反映出实际生活中师与生、生与生之间的问候场景，能激发学生模仿和表演的兴趣。此板块自然融人了板块一中的问候语Good morning.并向学生首次介绍本册教材的主要人物Mi Li。此外，还让学生综合运用此前学习过的打招呼的方式，是对已知知识的汇总。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:人物头饰、挂图录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:英文名字卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师走进教室跟学生打招呼:Good morning!学生跟教师打招呼:Good morning!让学生自然进人本板块的学习情境。

②教师走到学生中间，向学生问好，或者学生之i司互相}.a-,i候。教师还可以播放教材第5页上的录音内容，让学生熟悉对话。

③通过挂图或课件向学生呈现本板块内容，让学生看一看、听一听。可以分层呈现课文，如先复习一下同学之间是怎样打招呼的，然后结合课文展示师生之间的问候方式。

④让学生跟着录音读一读，鼓励学生养成善干模仿录音语音语调的习惯。

(2)活动设计建议。

①呈现新课后，单独把“Good morning,...”作为互相问候的练习，进行大小声练习或抢椅子活动。

②分角色朗读或分角色表演课文。可以是全班分大组进行，也可以在小组内进行。

③通过游戏操练本课主要句型Good morning,„和Goodbye,„具体游戏可参考本课资源库。

④教师向学生模拟上课下课时的情景，运用本板块功能句，然后让学生扮成小老师，进行练习。板块三

Listen and sing

1.设计意图

板块三的内容是学唱英文歌曲“Good Morning"。歌曲采用学生熟悉的曲调，简单上口，学生易学乐唱。教学时教师既可以与板块二安排在同一课时进行，也可以根据自己的实际教学进度合理安排。

2.课前准备

教师准备:录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1>板块内容教学建议。

①师与生或生与生之间进行问候与道别的对话练习〔food morning.和(goodbye.

②播放歌曲，让学生先感知歌曲的曲调，然后加人歌词，可以先读后唱。

(2)活动设计建议。

①学习歌曲之后，让学生进行多种形式的练习，比如小组歌曲评比、小组合唱等。

Leon

在学习前两课问候语的基础上，本课向学生呈现了自我介绍的表达方式I am a pupil.I

板块一 a pupil.

板块二

am a teacher.以及课堂指令用语Stand up. Sit down, please.Look, listen and say学习自我介绍，功能句为I am Tom.和I 教师应注意please ，listen and do学习指令用语Stand up.和Sit down, please.的用法，缓和语气，以增强学生的亲近感。

板块三Listen and do以游戏的形式操练指令用语。

1.知识目标

(1)能够听、说、认读单词pupil,teacher,please等。

(2)能够听懂、会说句子I am a pupil/teacher.Good morning.Stand up.Sit down, please.

2.能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2)能够完成从打招呼、问候到自我介绍的整个过程。

(3)能够对教师或同学的指令做出正确反应。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

培养学生良好的英语课课堂意识。通过对pleas。的理解，培养学生礼貌待人的意识。

板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块旨在帮助学生学会如何通过同一个句型介绍自己的名字和身份。板块设计图文并茂，容易吸引学生的注意力。图画中人物的身份辨识度高，三幅图的人物符合各自的年龄和身份特点，学生很容易认出前两幅图是学生，第三幅图是教师，从而更加容易理解pupil和teache:的概念。学生在此之前已经学过用I am„介绍名字，本板块延伸到用I am a pupil.介绍身份，过渡自然，便于学生识别和区分。

2.课前准备

教师准备:本课主要人物的头饰、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①通过师与生、生与生之间的问候交流，让学生快速进人课堂学习的情境。然后以歌曲“Hello"(详见第1课资源库)作为热身环节的结束。例如: Teacher: Hello, boys and girls.Students: Hello, Mi...Teacher; Hello, Mike.

Mike: Hello, Mi...Teacher: Can you say hello to others?

Mike :(转身找另一名学生)Hello, Jack.

Jack: Hello, Mike.以此类推。

②通过看一看、听一听，让学生整体感知本板块的对话，初步理解pupil和

W ache:的含义，歼I}_跟右录音读·读，然后结合实际进行学习与操练。

③在语言操练的过程，卜可以让学‘}川台当小老师，这样可以自然合理地让

学生练习句j I am ti lcacher.

④尽可能多地日学’L听录ro井模仿，休会地道的语音语调。

⑤分角色扮演或朗读i夕f:生喜欢的练习形式。本板块有3个角色，可以分3

个组进行角色扮演或朗读，也。f以3人一组，分小组活动。

(2)活动设讨一建议。

①复习导入环节可以让学生进行自我介绍。可以是单个学生起来介绍，也可以是同桌合作互相介绍，还可以利用游戏“找朋友”来介绍。

②游戏:掷色子。

用卡纸做一个正方休，在每个面上分别写上一个英语单词，包括英文名字和单词、eacher.pupil。组内同学轮流掷色子，根据朝上一面的单词来说I am二或 Iama„这个游戏可供小组活动时用。

③本板块也可以适当增加简单的歌曲歌谣，对句型进行有变化的操练。教师可以选择简单、上口和熟悉的曲子，用本板块的句型自己创编歌曲歌谣。(提供歌曲见资源库) 板块二JLook, listen and do

1.设计意图

板块二以真实的课堂情景呈现语言，贴近学生生活实际。场景通过描述教师进课堂、学生起立、师生互致问候等场景来呈现语言。这样的设计易于让学生理解指令用语“起立”“坐下”的英语表达，并在交流中运用之前学过的Good morning.等问候语，从语用层面操练语言。教师所说的指令语Sit down, please.旨在引导学生有礼貌地表达指令，从而在潜移默化中对学生进行礼仪教育。

2.课前准备

教师准备:本课挂图、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师走进教室跟学生打招呼:Good morning

3.教学建议

(])板块内容教学建议

①出示本板块的挂图。通过听一听、读一读、让学生初步感知本板块的活动形式，并逐步熟悉出现在活动中的学生名字。

②教师下指令Stand up.或Sit down, please.学生根据指令做动作。

③选择一名学生当小老师下指令，其他学生做动作。反应迅速且动作正确的小组获胜。

(2)活动设计建议。

①把全班分成几个小组，每个小组6至8人，大家轮流当组长。组长下达指令，要求使用组内同学的名字:Stand up, Peter. Sit down, Peter. Stand up, Mike.Sit down.Mike.反应迅速并且动作正确的同学得到表扬。

②游戏:我们都是小班长。

请几位同学依次扮演老师，模拟开课时的问候场景，其余同学全都是小班长，大家一起边说口令stand叩和sit down，边根据自己的口令做出正确的动作。

1.歌曲“Hello"谱子详见第1课资源库) Hello，二!Do,oh,do.Hello,...!Do,oh,do.Hello,...!Do,oh,do.Hello! Hello! Hello! 2.歌曲(用“Are you sleeping?”的曲调演唱，谱子详见第1课资源库) am Mi...I am Mi...I am a teacher.I am a teacher.am.，.I am...am a pupil.I am a pupil.

Leon

本课围绕一般疑问句的简略形式及其回答展开教学。例如:A box? Yes.An apple? No.

板块一Look, listen and say学习一般疑问句的简略形式A box? An apple?以及正确使用Yes.或No.进行判断和回答。本板块还包括学习ball , bag, cat, book, box, apple这6个单词。

板块二Ask and answer通过问答的形式，学习运用一般疑问句的简略形式及其回答。

板块三Look and match通过连线的练习形式，加强学生对单词与其含义的理解。

板块四Look, listen and say通过例词apple, bag, cat, book, box, ball 教字母Aa和Bb，要求学生能听、说、读、写字母Aa和Bb，并掌握字母在例词中的发音。 1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读本课单词ball, bag, cat, book, box, appleo (2)能听懂、会说本课一般疑问句的简略形式A box? An apple?并根据实际

14回答YC `.或No.

(3)能够听、说、读、写字母A。和Bl>

9，能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(?)能用一般疑问句的简略形式进行提问，并根据实际情况做出正确的判断和回答。

3情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(1)培养学生对不认识物品的兴趣和好奇心及乐于询问的意识。

(2)培养学生在英语课堂中大胆用英语问答的主动性。

Je麒9} 板块一}Look, listen and say一

1.设计意图

板块一是学生第一次接触用简单的疑问语气提问从而获取信l:.、的操练，对

后面的语言学习具有里程碑的作用。板块中各个小主人公通过手持单词卡片的形式呈现了本课6个新单词ball, bag, cat, book, box, apple以及冠词a和an 的用法。在学生掌握了这些单词之后，学习用一般疑问句的简略形式A box? An apple?进行提问，并根据实际情况用Yes.或No.做出正确回答。本板块的画面形象直观，符合小学生的认知特点。句型以功能句的形式出现，旨在让学生对所学单词及句型进行替换练习。

2.课前准备

教师准备:本课的单词卡片或实物、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①本课单词之间联系不大，没有统一的类别。可以设置这样一个情境:Mi Li要过生日了，学生每人为她画了一幅画作为生日礼物。

②用单词卡片或者实物来呈现本课6个新单词。如果是用实物教学，可以

这样设计:对学生说PCtC'C画的就是这个UOX.直接出示盒子进行教学。然后盒

子里放着Ton:所L}!I的书包，一卜J包里放着其他实物。这样在呈现新单同时给学生设置一点悬念，他们的注意力会比较集中

③通过看一看、听一听，让学生整休感知本板块的句型。通过跟读句子让学生学习如何用升调说出一般疑问句的简略形式，并且能够根据实际情况用Yes.或No.进行判断和回答口

④比学生2人一组，轮流提问，进行问答练习。

(2)活动设计建议

①可以通过游戏等形式对单词进行操练。比如:What's miing?

②游戏:猜一猜。

a.让一名学生上台，背对黑板。教师向其他学生出示单词卡片，让这名学生猜一猜，r匕如A ball?其他学生根据他的猜测来判断Yes.或No.

b.教师随意抽一张单词卡片，让学生猜一猜，教师回答Yes.或No.板块二一Ask and answer

1.设计意图

板块二的设计意图是引导学生在实际的语言场景中运用板块一所学单词和句型。活动发生地就在学生熟悉的英语课堂上，教师拿实物提问，学生进行回答。这样的场景贴近学生生活实际，易于引起学生的共鸣。本板块强调对一般疑问句的简略形式及其回答的实际运用，旨在让学生正确使用一般疑问句的提问方式，并根据实际情况正确运用Yes.或No.进行判断和回答。

2.课前准备

教师准备:本课的单词卡片、挂图、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①先进行单词的复习朗读，让学生快速回忆上节课所学的单词。通过“猜一猜”游戏，练习一般疑问句的简略形式及其回答。

②用挂图呈现新课，听录音让学生先感知本课文本，然后模仿录音的语音语调进行朗读。

③对课文进行分角色朗读或分角色表演可以是全班分大组进行，也可以在小组内进行。

①本板块也可以根据教师的教学实际，’万板块一进行整合。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:猜一猜。

因为本课是对一般疑问句的简略形式及其回答的练习，因此可以通过“猜一猜”的游戏，自然而然地让学生使用句型。比如，教师乎拿单词卡片，让一名学生上台背对教师进行提问，台下学生一起回答;或者教师选择一张单词卡片，让学生猜，然后教师回答。

②让学生课前准备板块一中六个单词的卡片。本板块教学时可以进行2人合作或小组合作的问答活动。板块三

Look and match

1.设计意图

板块三是本课的拓展巩固环节，通过对单词和图片的正确连线，再次夯实对板块一中的6个单词的记忆，检验学生是否理解单词的词义。教师可以适时引导学生运用前面所学到的一般疑问句句型进行实际操练，达到语言交际的目的。

2.课前准备

教师准备:挂图、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

可以把这一板块整合到板块一的教学中，作为对板块一教学的检测，或者放到本课最后，作为自测练习。板块四{Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

从本课板块四开始字母的教学。本板块通过例词教字母Aa和Bb，该板块相对独立于其他板块，教师可以指导学生通过听录音和观察例词，掌握字母在例词中的准确发音和规范书写。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:字母卡片、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

(2>';_生准备:作业本。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①复习:yple, bag, cat, book, ball, box这6个单词。可以选择比较轻松的形式，比如结合板块

一、二的句型做“猜一猜”游戏。

②教师播放两个字母的录音，让学生模仿。教师出示字母A8和Bb的卡片，学生认读，然后播放录音，学生跟读，注意纠正学生的发音。教师应引导学生注意字母的音形结合。

③教师板书示范并讲解书写要领，学生跟随教师示范进行模仿。然后，学生进行书写练习，教师指导。

④教师播放单词录音，让学生体会字母在单词中的发音。例如:A is Ior apple/bag/cat. B is for book/ball/box.

⑤让学生进行小组活动，讨论含有相同发音的单词，并进行展示汇报。

(2)活动设计建议。

①歌谣(详见本课资源库)。

可以通过歌谣进行巩固操练。比如:A is for apple, /ae八/，/，/二/.

②教师在示范书写时，要提醒学生注意字母书写的笔顺。 1.歌谣

A is for apple, /ae八/x八/况八 A is for bag, /x八/，八/二/.A is for cat,/二八/ae八/二/.B is for book,/b/,/b/,/b/.B is for ball,/b八/b八/b/.B is for box,/b/,/b/,/b/.2.游戏:猜一猜

教师手拿单词卡片，让一名学生上台背对教师进行提问，猜教师手中卡片上

Leon

本课是第4课教学内容的延续，学生在第4课中已接触过一般疑问句的缩略形式，如:A box? Yes. An apple? No.本课是在第4课的基础上呈现一般疑问句的完整表达形式Is it a tree? Is it a ruler?及其简略回答Yes./No.并在第4课的基础上，学习陈述句It is a book.

板块一Look, listen and say学习一般疑问句的基本结构，功能句为Is it a tree/ruler?在情境中呈现pen, ruler, tree, pencil等单词。

板块二Look and gue用画画猜谜的方式，进一步学习运用Is it a/ an...?在巩固操练板块一内容的同时，根据情境的需要呈现并学习boy和girl 这两个新单词。

板块三Listen, point and say为语言操练板块，可以用课堂活动的形式复习前面所学的相关知识，并以It is a/an.二这种新的语言表达形式来呈现。

板块一在语境中呈现词汇和句型。板块二进一步巩固运用主句型。板块三滚动复现以前所学的名词并自然呈现新句型It is a/an...，为第6课的学习做简单的铺垫。 1.知识目标

(I)能听、说、认读单词tree, ruler, pen, pencil, boy, girlo

(2)能够听懂、会说核心句型Is it a tree? Is it a ruler? It is a book.

2.能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2)能够在图片、实物或情境的帮助下运用句型Is ita...?进行简单的提问，并能根据具体情境做出正确回答。

(3)能够在实际情境中，运用It is a„来描述物品，达到语用目的。

3，情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(1>通过图画，引导学生大胆想象，初步培养学生的英语思维意识。

(2>通过图文匹配的方式引导学生在词语与相应事物之间建立联想，培养学生积极运用所学英语进行交流和表达的意识。板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

此板块借助绘画这一情境，采用对话的呈现方式，引出本节课的单词教学，话题内容与学生生活密切相关，图文并茂，降低了学生理解的难度。学生通过参与绘画的过程，理解并自然运用语言Is it a/an...?同时，在情境中理解一般疑问句的语用功能并学习新单词。

本板块复现了第4课中已经学过的box, bag, book，目的是巩固学生对学过单词的记忆。在教学过程中，教师可以灵活运用学过的单词引出新句型。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图或者多媒体课件。

(2)教师和学生准备:相关单词的实物、卡片、纸袋或者书包。

3.教学建议

(I>板块内容教学建议。

①利用多媒体课件或者单词卡片复习第4课的box, apple, book, bag, cat, ball等单词。

②教师出示一个盒子.让学生猜里面有什么学生可以运用第a课中的句型

来问:l1 book's r1 bag? An apple'?教师引导学生用新句型Is it a/an.二?进行猜测，

从而引人h a a}a二二’2的教学。教师注意使用Is it ai an二?句型进行连读示范。

③在猜测的过程中.教师在盒子里分别放入pen和pencil两种文具，通过猜

测引出新单同。

④教师可采用绘画的形式，让学生用Is is a/an...?来猜，引出ruler和tree

这2个单词。

⑤听录音，模仿单词和对话的正确发音。特别是一般疑问句的升调，教师要

充分示范并注意指导学生的语音语调。

⑥小组用准备的物品，做摸一摸、猜一猜的活动。通过反复操练，巩固和运

用本节课的主要句型和新单词，也可以采用画一画、猜一猜的形式进行。

(2)活动设计建议。

①看一看、猜一猜。

此活动将单词放在语境和对话中，可用于新授、操练或语言输出环节。

通过多媒体课件，出示某一物品，引导学生运用Is it a/an...?的句型来猜。通过此活动，启发学生想象，培养学生的观察和思考能力。

②画一画、猜一猜。

让学生在真实的活动中运用语言，并在参与、想象的过程中学习新词，感知 Is it a/an.?的语用功能。此活动可以用于新授、操练或语言输出环节。

教师可以画出某个文具的一部分，然后引导学生运用Is it a/an...?的句型来猜。

③摸一摸、猜一猜。

学生在真实的交流中使用本节课的句型，可用于操练或语言输出环节。

学生将事先准备好的物品，如尺子、钢笔、铅笔、苹果等放在书包里，同桌之间做猜一猜的活动，看谁能够猜中对方的物品。此活动也可以在小组内进行。

④指一指、猜一猜。

通过课本上的图画，让学生进一步明确单词的音、形、义。此活动可以用于操练或语言输出环节。

一名学生指着自己课本中的某一个单词或者图画(注意不要让同桌看见)，

然后同桌运用Ia it }i an二?来猜他指的是什么。这一活动可以在同桌之间进行，也可以在小组或者全班进行板块二1Look and gue

1.设计意图

本板块用绘画的过程来呈现语言，将简单的句型变成一个有趣的课堂小故

事，在故事中操练、巩固和运用本节课的主句型。根据故事的需要，呈现并学习

新单词hoy和girl。这个活动可以带动教师和学生思考。本板块旨在通过绘画

的过程，启发学生的想象力，滚动复现学生的已有知识。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图或多媒体课件。

(2)教师和学生准备:白纸、笔。

3.教学建议

(D板块内容教学建议。

①绘画导人。教师可以在黑板上画一个物品，引导学生用Is it a/an...?这

一句型来猜所画的物品，自然进人本节课的学习。(图形设计可参考本课资源

库)

②通过挂图、多媒体课件呈现本课内容，让学生在看一看、猜一猜的活动中学习本节课的对话，并在参与中自然运用语言。

③教师领读，注意语音语调的示范与指导。

④根据板书或者多媒体课件中的图画提示，2人一组表演对话。

⑤教师可以通过简笔画或者课件，呈现某一件物品的绘图过程，引导学生运用本节课的语言猜一猜。

(2)活动设计建议。

①画一画、说一说。

通过此活动，让学生复述课文内容。此活动可用于操练或语言输出环节。

在学完对话之后，让学生试着画一画课本上的图画，将英语教学过程变为学生参与的过程。本节课可以适当发挥学生不同的特长，例如，让善于绘画的学生画画，让善于语言表达的学生来描述，给每一个学生充分展示自己的机会。此活

动可以在小组内或者同桌之间开展。

Oi}i一imi、猜一猜

此活动是对课文内容的拓展，可以很好地发挥学生的想象力，培养学生的思

维习惯，可用于操练或语言输出环节。

学生在熟练掌握本板块的内容之后，可以让他们充分发挥自己的想象力，在纸上或在黑板上画画。在学生绘画的过程中，教师引导其他学生猜一猜画的是什么，教师要注意提供语言帮助，如:teacher, pupil, box, apple, ball>bag, cat, book, tree, ruler, pen, pencil等。

③限时画画。

充分发挥每一个学生的想象力，运用本节课的语言创设语境。这一活动可用于操练或语言输出环节。

让学生在规定时间内画一样东西，当教师说停的时候，全体同学必须停下来。学生展示自己未完成的作品，同学之间互相猜一猜画的是什么。可以用于同桌之间，也可以用于小组之间或者在全班展示。

教师也可以在此活动中适当渗透下一节课的主句型What is this? 座亘巨,isten, point and sa口

1.设计意图

本板块通过教师与学生之间开展的一个小游戏，复习本课和第4课所学的名词，自然引出It is a/an„的表达方式，旨在帮助学生巩固所学知识，为第6课和第7课的学习做好铺垫。活动形式简单，易于教师组织和学生参与。教师可以根据自己的实际情况，在板块一和板块二的教学中适当、灵活地渗透本节课的语言，也可以在本节课中单独呈现。教师在教学中，可以根据教学的需要适当渗透第6课和第7课的核心句型What is this?

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图、多媒体课件等。

(2)教师与学生准备:第4课和第5课的单词卡片或图片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师把本节课中出现的6个单词的卜片贴在黑板上，一边贴一边与学IJ:.复习单词。也可用What is this?来提问，启发学生说出图片内容。教师根据学生的回答灵活运用新句型It，、„转换，例如:Yes. It is a/an... No. It is a/ an.学生通过教师的语言，初步感知It is a/an„这一句型。

②教师播放本节课的录音，学生根据录音内容指出正确的图片，培养学生根据关键信息找到对应图片的能力。在文本中学习It is a/an...句型，教师注意It ，S二句型的连读示范。

s02个小组或者男、女生比赛。每组各派出一名学生，教师或学生说出一个

句子，两个学生快速指出图画并说出正确句子，速度快者胜，其余同学做评委。

④同桌之间用自己准备的图片或单词卡片进行活动。一人出示自己的词卡，另一位同学快速用h is a/an„说出图画内容，正确的同学得到卡片，不正确

的同学要把自己的图片或者单词卡片送给对方。卡片多者胜。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:Come one

此活动可以复习第4课和第5课学过的所有名词，可用于操练或语言输出环节。教师将写有第4课和第5课所有名词的卡片贴在黑板上，并将学生分成两列站好，每次由两个学生参与比赛。在学生听到教师所发的口令:h is a book, one, two, three>go!后，站在前面的同学用小塑料锤敲击book图片，同时喊出 It is a book.速度最快的人为本组赢得一分。

②游戏:Sharp Eyeso

通过词图配对，帮助学生更好地记忆单词的音、形、义。可用于操练或语言输出环节。

一人出示词卡，只让其他学生看一下(即一晃而过)之后立即找到对应的图片，并说出句子It's a/an二此游戏可用于师生之间，小组之间和同桌之间。如果学生说错，教师可以适当渗透句型What's this?

③游戏:快闪快说。

此活动可以集中学生的注意力，巩固单词的音、形、义。可用于新授、操练和拓展环节。

通过多媒体课件快速呈现某一件物品，学生用句型:It is司an.二说出图画内容。

Leon

本课通过谈论玩具和图画，引出部分交通工具的名称car, taxi, train, bus 和部分物品以及动物名称door, chair, desk, dog。在第5课的教学中，学生已经初步接触过It is a/an„的表达形式，本课在第5课的基础上，呈现核心句型 What is this? It is a car.及其缩写形式What's this? It's a dog.

板块一Look, listen and say第一次呈现并学习特殊疑问句及其答语的基本结构，功能句为What is this? It is a car.并在情境中呈现car, taxi, train, bus这几个新词。

板块二Ask and answer谈论图画的课堂情境，让学生进一步学习和运用语言What is this? It is a/an„的缩略形式What's this? It's a/an„在巩固操练的同时，呈现并学习dog, door, chair这3个新词。

板块三Look, listen and say通过例词cat, chair, car, desk, door, dog 教字母Cc和Dd，要求学生能听、说、读、写字母Cc和Dd，并掌握字母在例词中的准确发音。 1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读本课单词car, taxi, train, bus, dog, door, chair, desko

(2)能够听懂、会说本课的核心句型What is this? It is a%an二及其缩略形式

What's this? It's a dog.

2.能力目标

(I)能够在图片、实物或情境的帮助下运用句型What is this，进行简单的提

问。并能运用It is a/an..进行正确的回答。

(2)能够在实际情境中，自然运用What's this?对自己不认识的事物提出疑问，能够听懂别人的提问并做出正确的回答。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(I)通过图画，引导学生积极参与各种学习活动，乐于感知，大胆想象，并积极尝试使用英语。

(2)通过图文匹配引导学生在词语与相应事物之间建立联想，培养学生积极运用所学英语进行交流和表达的能力。板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块通过2个孩子玩轨道火车的场景，引出部分交通工具的名称car, taxi, train, bus，并根据情境的需要呈现核心句型What is this? It is a/an„让

学生在情境中理解特殊疑问句的语用功能。这一场景是学生熟悉和喜爱的，两个孩子的对话充满了趣味性，图文并茂，能够很好地调动学生参与的积极性。

本板块复现了第4课中已经学过的单词book。在教学过程中，教师可以灵活运用第5课已经学过的单词tree, ruler, pen, pencil, boy, girl等引出新句型。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图或者多媒体课件。

(2)教师与学生准备:相关单词的玩具、卡片，袋子或者书包。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①通过游戏创设情境。教师出示袋子或者书包，将准备好的实物或者卜片装人袋子，边装边引导学生用It is Alan„来描述，帮助学生复习以前所学的名词。在这个过程中，让学生了解袋子里所装的物品是什么，明确猜测的范围。教师让学生到前面来摸一摸袋子里面的东西，并用What is this?提问，让学生试着用It is a/an„来回答自己摸到的物品。

学生在游戏中具体感知特殊疑问句What is this?的语用功能和结构形式，为后面学习新课做好准备。

②教师通过多媒体课件，介绍本节课的人物Tom和Ann，并展示玩轨道火车的场景，通过录音或多媒体课件，引出核心句型What is this?和单同car, taxi, train, bus的学习。需特别注意单词this的发音。

在学习单词时，注意示范元音字母及字母组合的发音，如:a, i, u, ar, ai。注意总结单词发音的规律，如:dad, stand, apple, bag, cat, taxi等。

③播放课文录音，让学生听录音并模仿句子和单词的正确发音。

④教师用多媒体课件出示不同年代的汽车、火车、公共汽车的图片，让学生认识各种各样的交通工具，在操练主要句型What is this?的同时，开阔学生视野。

⑤教师让一名学生面对同学站立，另一学生将玩具放在他的身后，拿玩具的学生用What is this?提问，站在前面的学生用It is a/an„来猜，全体同学根据猜测进行相应的回答。每位同学有3次机会，看谁能够快速猜中。采用游戏的方式，能够调动全体同学参与课堂活动的积极性，使大家在活动中自然运用本节课的句型。

①游戏:看剪影，猜一猜。

通过多媒体课件呈现部分名词的轮廓，让学生进一步体会What is this?的语用功能。可用于导人、新授、操练或者语言输出环节。

多媒体课件出示部分名词的黑白剪影图片，分组让学生用所学语言竞猜图片内容，然后教师出示正确答案，猜中图片内容者为本组加1分。

②游戏:图片猜猜猜。

此活动可以巩固单词的音、形、义。通过此活动进行听力训练，同时培养学

生的l-1语表达能力可以川于操练、巩}}'d和拓展环节

同桌间或分组进行活动。一名学生出示图片.然后让对方来猜衍人有3次

机会，若在3次内猜中，图片归对方所有。运用的句型是What is thia'} It、、:，

an，二图片多者胜。

③限时[}I 1a11

培养学生的绘画能力和动手能力。可以用于导人、新授或者操练，

教师规定画画的时间，全体同学在规定的时间内画一种自己喜欢的物品，时间一到，全体同学停止绘画。有的同学可能已经111完，有的同学可能没有完成。小组内互相展示和交流自己的作品，如果学生看不出来所画的物品是什么，同学之间可以用What is this? It is a/an„展开讨论。

④游戏:找朋友。

通过此游戏运用本节课的句型创设情境。可用于操练或者拓展环节。

把全班分成若于小组，2个小组之间找朋友，一组学生拿单词卡片，一组学生拿图片。学生之间相互用What is this? It is a/an二来询问和回答，单l7卡片和图片相匹配的两名学生成为朋友，并快速手拉手站到前面。看谁最先找到自己的朋友。板块二

Ask and answer

1.设计意图

本板块绘图风格简单，采用简笔画的形式，易于教师和学生模仿和辨析。通过两个学生对图画的谈论，自然引出What is its It is a„的缩略形式What's this? It's a/an„根据对话内容，在语境中呈现并学习dog, door, chaff:这3个新单词。

本板块旨在使学生在图片、实物或情境的帮助下，自然运用What's this?询问自己不认识的事物，能够听懂别人的提问并做出正确的回答。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图或者多媒体课件。

(2)教师与学生准备:白纸、铅笔或者彩笔。

3.教学建议

①教师在黑板上画出某物品的一部分，通过师生对图画的讨论，白然运用学

生已掌握的句型What is this It is a/an„教师鼓励学生大胆猜想并及时运用

缩略形式It's a/an„转述学生的语言。学生在教师的转述中，反复感知:t's的

读音。在学生有了一定的感知之后，教师通过板书或者句卡教It 1S-lt}S。随着

图画的不断变化，鼓励学生运用It's a„这种新的表达形式继续猜想。

本部分的设计，是运用学生已有的知识，引出新的表达形式It's a/an„同

时，让学生通过教师的课堂语言，大量感知What's this?这一核心句型。

②教师通过多媒体课件，介绍本节课的人物Tom和Lingling，提出问题

What are they talking about并在问题下面给出5种物品的图画，供学生选择，

其中包括本节课所学的3个单词dog, doo:和chaire

通过多媒体课件，让学生听录音、看图画，整体感知对话内容，学习单词dog,

door, chair，并通过，t's的发音，让学生试着读出新的缩略词what's o

③听录音，模仿语音语调。

④分角色扮演对话内容，可以给出3幅图画作为提示。

⑤学生之间运用自己的图片、单词卡片或简笔画，创编新的对话。

C2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:我来画，你来演。

此活动能够发挥学生不同的特长，可用于新授或者操练环节。

让善于绘画的学生到黑板上来画画，找两名学生根据绘画的内容，进行课本剧表演。

②游戏:抛绣球。

教师将所有单词卡片随意贴在黑板上，然后将一个玩具小熊作为“绣球”抛向学生，接到小熊的学生要站起来。这时教师指着卡片中的一张问What's this 引导学生用It's a/an„回答，回答正确的学生上讲台前继续抛“绣球”。这里教师要注意学生对a和an的使用是否正确。

③游戏:Sharp Eyes o

在语境中操练主句型，调动学生的视觉、听觉等多种感官。此环节可用于操

练和输出环节。

教师事先把若干图片放人袋里，请一名学生上来，从袋里取出一张，让其他学生看一下(即一晃而过)，然后迅速放回袋里。这学生提问:What's this?其他学生用It’s a/an„来回答。猜对者替换台上的学生，继续游戏。丽瘫下Look, listen and say习

1.设计意图

板块三通过例词教字母Cc和Dd，该板块相对独立于其他板块。在本板块中教师可以指导学生通过观察例词，掌握字母在例同中的准确发音和规范书写。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、光盘、挂图、字母卡片或多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:作业本、字母卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师播放两个字母的录音，让学生模仿。

②教师出示字母卡片C。和Dd，学生认读，然后播放录音，学生跟读，注意纠正学生的发音。教师应引导学生注意字母的音形结合。

③教师板书示范并讲解书写要领，特别是小写字母d的书写要领。学生仔细观察教师的书写，然后进行书写练习，教师巡视指导。

④教师播放录音，让学生体会字母在单词中的发音。例如:C is for cat/car/ chair.D is for desk/door/dog.

⑤让学生进行小组活动，讨论含有相同发音的单词，并进行汇报展示。

(2)活动设计建议。

①歌谣。

Letter "C"

Cats on the car, /k/，/k/,/k/.

Cats on the cow, /k/, /k/，/k/.

Cats on the cushion, /k/，/k/，/k/.

/k八s the sound of "C"，+C-，+C-.

Big C.little c.letter "C" is fun.

Letter "D"

Dogs are dancing./dj./d八/d/.

Ducks are dancing,/d/,/d/,/d/.

Deer are dancing,/d八;d八/d/.

/d,i is the sound of "D" "D" "D".

Big D, little d, I love "D".

②游戏:字母找朋友。

此活动可以用于师生之间，小组之间，同桌之间。

出示字母卡片，让学生说出排在它之前的一个字母或者后一个字母。

③比一比，看谁写得好。

请几名学生上台在黑板上比赛写字母。教师读出字母Aa , Bb , Cc , Dd中的一个，学生立即写下该字母的大小写形式。写得又快又正确的学生获胜。

④游戏:看谁快。

这是一个训练学生听字母的游戏，将全班分成2组，一组学生持大写字母C, A,B,D，另一组学生持小写字母b,d,a,c，教师快速念字母，要求持有该字母的学生迅速站起来，最先站起来的人得2分，后站起来的得1分，没站出来的得。分，得分多的组获胜。

1.游戏:Lucky Dog

教师把第4课、第5课、第6课出现的名词，制作成单词卡片和图片2种形式，分别放在2个袋子里。两名学生同时抽取，抽出之后用What's this?互相询问，如果抽到的图画与单词卡片相对应，这两名学生就是lucky dogso

可以使用的单词有:cat, chair, car, desk, door, dog, taxi, bus, tree, ruler, pen, pencil, boy, girl, bag, book, box, apple, ballo

2.认识缩略形式

英语中经常出现缩写的形式，它一般是在第一个单词后面加“”，，再加上第二

Leon

在第4课学习了A/An...? Yes./No.，第5课、第6课学习了一般疑问句Is

it a...?和特殊疑问句What's this? It's a„的基础上，本课进一步学习一般疑问句Is it a/an...?及其简略回答Yes./No.并学习字母Ee和Ff及其在单词中

的发音。

板块一Look, listen and say通过魔术表演的情境复习功能句型What's this? It's a/an...

板块二Touch and gue通过猜测游戏活动，让学生进一步理解Is it a...? Yes./No.的语用功能，同时本板块也是一种操练形式，可以让学生在实际生活中运用本课所学句型。

板块三Look, listen and say主要通过几个例词，学习字母Ee和Ff，要求学生能听、说、读、写，并让学生感悟字母Ee和Ff在单词中的发音。 1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读本课单词banana, orange, come, here, bed, fish,farmero (2)能够听懂、会说并认读本课的主要句型What's this? It's a/an...Is it a ball? No.Is it an orange? Yes.

(3)能听、说、读、‘，J‘产母r}和rr,并了解其在单词中的发音

2.能力目标

(1)能准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2)能够在实际情境中，运用本课句型What's this? It's a/an... Ia it。/ an...?Yes./No.进行实际询问和回答。

(3)能够在情境中运用句型Come here,，二表达指令。

(4)听、看字母，」卜能说出其对应的发音。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(1)培养学生善于观察和思考的能力，引导学生初步形成英语思维意识。

1.设计意图

本板块设置的魔术表演情境，符合学生的年龄和认知特点，能吸引学生的注意力，激发学生学习英语的兴趣。学生在本册第4课中学习了A/An...? Yes./ No.在第5课和第6课中学习了What's this? It is a.../It's a„本板块整合第4 课、第5课、第6课所学内容，复习句型What's this? It's a„同时学习句型It's an„和单词banana, orange，旨在使学生进一步理解以上句型的语用功能，在实际生活中灵活运用以上语言。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:本课所要用的实物、单词卡片、录音机、磁带、光盘或多媒体课件、挂图等。

(2)学生准备:相关单词卡片或实物。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①在师生问好后，教师可以通过画一画、猜一猜、快看快说等形式复习以前

所学句型和单词。

③教师播放知名魔术师的表演，导人本课情境，如: Qian.Yes.Liu Qian is a super magician.Watch careful Look.who's coming'? Liu 1y.What's tlvs?教i)ili也可

以本人扮作魔术师表演魔术:Yoys and girls.look at carefully.What's this?然后顺势导人课本情境 me.I'm a magician. Watch

③教师播放录音，让学生看一看、听一听并模仿，然后分小组进行朗读。

④小组进行朗读展示。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:我问你答。

该活动采用玩扑克牌的形式，让学生在玩中操练、巩固所学内容，可用于操练和语言输出环节。

让学生利用手里的单词卡片同桌间相互询问，以便进一步巩固句型和新单词。一名学生出示图片或单词卡片，问:What's this，另一名学生回答:It's a/ an„答对的学生便赢得这张卡片，然后交换提问。最终卡片赢得最多者获胜。

②游戏:摸一摸、猜一猜。

该活动采用游戏形式，让学生在玩中巩固所学内容，可用于操练环节。

教师叫一名学生上前，为他蒙上眼睛，并把书、苹果、橘子等一一放在他手中，问:What's this?学生回答:It's a/an„该活动也可在同桌之间进行。

③游戏:比比谁说得多(想象大比拼)。

该活动采用比赛的形式，可以有效地调动学生参与的积极性，可用于新授、操练或语言输出环节。

教师通过多媒体课件，出示被遮住一部分的物品，问:What's this?让学生发挥想象回答:It's a/an„看谁说得多，说得正确。教师可先示范，然后让一名学生操纵鼠标并发问，其余同学回答。该活动也可采用男女生比赛的形式。板块二

Touch and gue

1.设计意图

本板块采用摸一摸、猜一猜的方式，活动形式贴近学生生活实际，为学生所喜爱，能激发学生参与英语学习的兴趣，使学生在游戏情境中操练本课目标语

言。本板块在学习板块一When s this' It’ s a!an，二句塑的从础_L，比学生进-

步理解和运用Is it a/an...} Yes./No.的语用功能，同时操练板块一中学过的yl

词banana和I orange

2.课前准备

(”教师准备:苹果、橘子、眼罩、布袋等物品和单iui卡片、录音机、磁带、光盘

或多媒体课件、挂图。

}2)学生准备:苹果、橘子、眼罩、布袋等物品和单词卡片。

3.教学建议

(I>板块内容教学建议。

教师可模仿课本中摸一摸、猜一猜的游戏，出示一个布袋，内藏本课所用到

的实物，让一名学生到黑板前面来，摸一摸，猜一猜，顺势导出:Come here,„然

后让学生边摸边猜:Is it a/an...?从而进人本板块的学习。同桌之间也可玩此

游戏。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:摸一摸、猜一猜。

通过摸一摸、猜一猜的游戏，操练并巩固本课目标语言，可用于操练环节或

语言输出环节。

教师让一名学生上前，为他蒙上眼睛，让他快速摸书本的一侧，问:What's

this?引导学生说:Is it a book?其余学生用Yes, it is./No, it isn't.回答。

②游戏:画一画、猜一猜。

通过画一画、猜一猜的游戏，操练并巩固本课目标语言，可用于操练或语言输出环节。

教师预先构思所画图案(可参考课本第19页的图)，边画边让学生猜，最早猜出答案的同学得分最高。例如，在黑板上画一个圆，问:What's this?学生猜:Is it a/an...?如学生猜不出，教师继续画，直到学生能猜出为止。

③游戏:心有灵犀一点通。

该活动能发挥学生的想象力，具有挑战性和趣味性，能有效地调动学生学习的积极性，可用于操练或语言输出环节。

让一名学生面向大家，教师向其出示一张图片(注意不要让其他同学看到)，

该学生根据图片比划动作并提问:What's this?其余同学猜:Is it a/an...`?该生回答:Yes, it is./No, it isn't.所练词汇范围可扩展到学生学过的所有名词。该活动也可以以小组形式进行。板块三{Look, listen and say一

1.设计意图

本板块继续字母教学，与其他板块相对独立，词汇与图片同时出现，形象直

观，便于学生学习字母和理解单词意义。通过复习学习词汇bed, pen, fish,

farmer，学习字母Ee和Ff，并学习这两个字母在单词中的发音，让学生达到听、

说、读、写的要求。教师可引导学生通过观察单词的共性，引出字母的教学，并感

悟该字母在单词中的发音。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:本课所用实物或图片、单词卡片、字母卡片、录音机、磁带、光

盘或多媒体课件、挂图等。

(2)学生准备:单词卡片、字母卡片。

3.教学建议

(I)板块内容教学建议。

①教师播放字母歌曲或字母音素歌，复习字母Aa和Bb及其发音，导人本课。

②教师呈现pen的实物或卡片，询问:What's this引导学生回答:It's a pen.同法引出bed并教学生读。教师引导学生观察bed和pen，从而找出它们相同的字母Ee，引导学生读单词，感悟并发现字母Ee在单词中的发音。用同样的方法教学生学习字母Ff及其例词fish和farmer，引导学生观察、感悟Ff在单词中的发音。

③教师播放录音，学生跟读，小组进行朗读练习。

④教师板书示范这2个字母的书写，强调笔顺及占格。学生先模仿教师进行书写练习，然后自行书写。教师注意巡视指导。

(2)活动设计建议。

①说一说、做一做。

该活动为快速反应练习，可以有效巩固字母的认读和发音，可用于操练

阶段。

教师说出字母Ee的发音，学生快速反应举起字母Ee.或者教师出示字母，学

生说字母的发音，该活动可采用比赛的形式，在男女生之间或同桌之间进行。

②游戏:回家行动。

该活动通过单词和字母的对应练习，可以有效帮助学生认读单词，使学生进

一步理解字母和单词的联系。

教师准备2个小房子卡片贴在黑板上，卡片上分别写上字母Ee和Ff.把单

词bed, pen, fish, farmer打乱顺序也贴在黑板上，让学生比赛给单同分类，分别把这些单词贴到不同的小房子上，贴得又快又正确者获胜。教师还可以启发学生说出他们知道的其他含有字母Ee和Ff的单词。

③游戏:我是大赢家。

该活动为词汇认读练习，用于词汇巩固和操练。

一名学生出示单词卡，另一名学生快速读出，读得正确的赢得该卡片，然后交换，赢得卡片最多者获胜。该活动可在同桌之间进行。

④歌谣。

该歌谣可以练习和巩固字母在单词中的发音。

Ee, Ee, Ee, /e/, /e八/e/./e/for bed,/e/for pen

Ff,Ff,Ff,/f/,/f/,/f/./f/for fish>/f/for farmer.

1.游戏:我画你答

教师在黑板上画出一个物品的局部，问:What's this?引导学生进行猜测:Is it a/an...?该活动可以4人一小组或在同桌之间进行。

2.游戏:百宝箱

目的:练习What's this? It's a/an„句型。

道具:一个布袋或一个一面有洞的大箱子，一些玩具、文具，如:铅笔、书、钢笔、书包、玩具猫、玩具狗、玩具鸟等。

方法:(1)把要练习的单词的具体物品放进布袋或纸箱。

Leon

在第5课、第6课、第7课学习了介绍物品的句型It is a/an„的基础上，本课引出介绍物品的另一表达法This is a/an„和It is a/an„的否定形式It's not a/an...

板块一Look, listen and say用妈妈在家教孩子认识物品的情景，学习This is a/an...生的实际生活。

It's not a„的正确表达，目标语言简练突出，情景温馨，贴近学

板块二Look and say为操练板块，用同桌之间讨论物品名称的形式，巩固板块一的内容，形式较为活泼，便于教师操作。

板块三Listen and sing本板块是一首节奏活泼明快的歌曲，歌词内容联系本课所学词汇，多次重复，易于操作，版面形式生动活泼，易于激发学生的兴趣。 1.知识目标

(1)能听、说、认读本课的not,table, egg这3个单词。

(2)能听懂、会说并认读本课的主要句型This is a/an...It's not a...(3)学会唱本课歌曲“My Bag" o

2.能力目标

(1>能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2>能够在实际情境中运用句型This is a; an...It’s n of:、„介绍某些物品的名称。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(I)培养学生善于观察和思考的能力，引导学生初步形成英语思维意识。

(2)培养学生乐于运用英语进行交流和表达的能力。板块一】Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块设置妈妈在家教孩子认识各种物品的生活情景，画面紧密结合主句

型，便于学生理解和掌握核心语言。本板块是第5课、第6课、第7课内容的延

伸，在学习了介绍物品的句型It's a/an„的基础上，继续学习介绍物品的另一种

表达方式This is a/an„及句型It's a/an二的否定形式It's not a„同时学习

单词not, table.eggo

2.课前准备

(”教师准备:物品实物或图片、单词卡片、眼罩、录音机、磁带、光盘或多媒体课件、挂图等。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师出示一个球的实物或图片，问:What's this?学生回答:It's a ball.教师接着出示一个鸡蛋的实物或图片，问:Is this a ball?学生回答:No, it isn't.教师引导学生说:This is an egg.It's not a ball.然后进行操练。其他物品的对比可照此进行。

②让学生看课本，听一听、读一读。

③钊一学生用所学语言介绍物品。

④教师示范,; i_学生以对话的形式展T例如，一名学生说:It's a desk.另一

名学生回答;This is a table.It's not a desk.

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:背靠背。

该活动通过做猜一猜的游戏练习核心句型，可用于操练和语言输出阶段。

同桌两人背靠背坐着，一人出示一张图片，不让背后的同学看见，另一人说:

It's a„拿图片的同学就说:This is a/an...It's not„然后交换练习。看谁猜对的次数多。此活动也可以是一人抽取图片，另一人说:It's a...抽图片的人则说:This is a/an...It's not二注意不能让对方看见图片内容。

②游戏:盲人摸象。

该活动采用摸一摸、猜一猜的形式，操练和巩固核心句型。

选取一排学生戴上眼罩，让第一名学生触摸一个物品的一部分(记住速度要快，触摸面要小)，说:It's a/an.二第二位学生则接着触摸并说:This is a/an...It's not a„第三位学生触摸后说:This is a/an...It's not a„有的物品可采用闻一闻的方法。板块二

Look and say

1.设计意图

本板块作为操练板块，提供了练习示例和容易混淆的图片，便于学生操练主句型。教师可以按照课本上的游戏形式进行，也可以自己创设情境。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:物品实物或图片、单词卡片、眼罩、录音机、磁带、光盘或多媒体课件、挂图等。

(2)学生准备:物品实物或图片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师出示一个物品的实物或图片，说:This is a/an...It's not a/an...

②让学生逐一介绍其他物品。

③让学生看课本听一听、读一读.然后在小组内练习。

④小组进行展示

(2)活动设月一建议。

①游戏:照猫ICI虎

本活动通过画一画、猜一猜的形式，操练并巩固核心句型。

同桌之间各自画一个物品，故意把物品画得四不像，然后问同桌:What's

this，同桌回答:It's a/an„同桌猜对了则赢得该图画;猜不对时，提问的学生说:This is a/an... It's not a„两人可比赛，看谁赢的次数多。

②游戏:看一看、猜一猜。

该活动通过猜一猜游戏，调动学生参与的积极性，可用于操练或语言输出阶段。

教师通过多媒体课件，出示被隐去一部分的物品，问:What's this?一名学生猜:It's a/an„教师出示该物品的全貌，猜对了全体同学说:Yes, it's a/an„猜不对则全体同学说:This is a/an...It's not a/an...板块三

Listen and sing

教师既可以在每节课的开始播放本部分歌曲作为热身，也可以放在一节课的中后部分，在学生有些疲劳的时候播放此歌曲。教师可以先教歌词，然后一句一句地领唱。

1.游戏:掷色子

用卡纸做一个正方体，在每个面上分别写上本课所用到物品的单词，注意相对的一面写一对单词，例如table和desk,egg和bal l等。组内同学轮流掷色子，根据朝上一面的单词来说This is a/an...It's not a/an二这个游戏可供小组活动时用。

2.游戏:摸一摸、猜一猜

教师每次请一名学生到讲台前戴上眼罩，由教师随意给该名学生一个物品

Revision

本课是复习课，整合了第1至第8课所学句型和重点词汇，并进一步强化巩。教师可以根据具体需要和学生实际情况，复习全部内容。板块一

Look, listen and say 本板块同时出现了desk和table, (详见本课资源库)。

主要复习所学物品名称和This is„句型。

便于学生通过学习更好地辨识两个词语的不同

板块二Look and say呈现了学过的重点词汇。

1至第8课中出现频率较高，但因没有学完26个字母，明，所以区别起来有一定的难度，其中不定冠词a/an在第不便从元音的角度给予说

在此板块的学习中可做强化记忆。板块三Look, listen and do 一问句做出正确的回答，

通过一定的语境，让学生对What's this?这并能识别组成答语的各个单词，如It's an 学生对此语言结构的整体感知。对句子开头字母要大写， egg.重点训练

号，以及中英文标点符号的区别，如“。句子结尾要有标点符 ”和“.”，可做适当说明。板块四Look, listen and do 一问句做出正确的回答，的单词，又要识别答语。

通过一定的语境，让学生对Is this a boxy 与板块三不同的是，这

勺极块三小同的是，本板块要求学生既要识别组成问句

毛旨占之早幸国v汗}.u5n.a}-r}众j认，甘今眨一名五占石震女A k-r}勺 1.知识目标，能力目标

(I)复习第I至第8课所学词汇及对话，使学生能在具体情境中运用。

(2)能听债、会说学过的文具、交通工具、水果等物，'i 戏或活动中做出正确的反应。

2.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

(1)通过用英语做游戏，进一步培养学习英语的兴趣。

(2>继续培养学生主动用英语问候及道别的习惯 o

(3)了解汉语和英语书面表达中标点符号的异同。的名称、井在妊休的游板块一{Look, listen and say 1.设计意图

用This is a/二二这一句型对物品进行描述是本册的一个学习重点，并且This is 的发音对初学者来说是一个难点。因此，本板块将生活中常见的物品用形象的图画呈现出来，重点复习巩固table, tree, bus等单词及This is a/an二这一句型。

2.课前准备

教师准备:挂图、录音机或者多媒体课件、单词图片。 3.教学建议

(1>板块内容教学建议。

①教师与学生互相用英语问候，两个月的英语了，

然后对学生说:"Lingling和Tom 他们都非常喜欢英语。这天放学回家的时候，已经学了

开始，一路上要尽量用英语说一说所看到的物品。瞧，他俩相约从教室 `desk’开始了„„，，

②让学生边听录音，

③让学生再听录音，行必要的强调和点拨。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:火眼金睛。 Lingling已经从身边的

边指认句子或图片。整个过程应始终做到音、形边听边跟读模仿句子的语音语调，、义结合。

教师适时跟进，并进

把table, tree, bus等单词图片分别藏在教室不同的地方，让2至4名学生分

别去寻找找到后用This is aian„句型进行描述比一比谁找得最多说T-"r 1r 准确。

②点拨助学。

让学生仔细观察本板块中desk与table图片的异同，简要说明两者的区别，教师可参照本课资源库做适当补充说明。板块二

Look and say

1.设计意图

在词语与相应物品之间建立一定的联想是很重要的一种学习策略，在学生

初学时，就要做适当的引导。本板块综合了第1至第8课的18个重点单词，通过

玩“跳房子”的游戏，强化图片和单词间的对应关系，要求学生用This is a/an...

进行描述，与第一板块相比增加了复习巩固的词汇量，使a,an同时出现，强调其

不同的功能。

2.课前准备

教师准备:一个盒子、文具、水果等实物，也可以准备相关物品的单词图片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师利用单词图片复习部分单词，及时纠正学生掌握不太准确的单词。

②教师将准备好的文具、水果等物品(或卡片)放到盒子里。告诉学生马上

要进行一个“跳房子”比赛，参与的学生先摸出盒子里的一个物品(或卡片)，如果

能用英语准确说出其名称，就可以得到小奖品。

③游戏:跳房子。

充分利用本板块图片，让学生两人一组，用“剪刀、石头、布”(rock-paper- sciors)游戏决定胜负，胜出的学生先开始跳单数格，另一人则跳双数格。用 This is a/an„描述方格中的图片，回答准确且跳格多者胜出。

④点拨助学。

引导学生发现apple,orange,egg前面用an表示“一个”，并对其做适当的强化记忆。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:心有灵l}l= 30秒

教师准备已经学过的名i}'}J的实物、玩其或图片，邀请两名学生到讲台前·其中一名学生随机拿起一件物o}}l另一名学生猜，不能让另一名学生看见。负责猜的学生用A ruler?这样的句型来猜。如果猜中了，全体学生回答:Yes.反之4 则回答;No.比一比30秒钟内哪两名学生史心有灵犀。

②本课为复习课，教师尽员组织小组或两人活动，力争使更多的学生参与到游戏活动中。

板块三}Look, listen and do

1.设计意图

为了激发学生学习英语的兴趣，课堂中经常采用游戏的方式，减轻语言学习

的难度，增加其趣味性。本板块就是通过“单词排队大比拼”这一小组活动，复习

巩固第

6、第7课的核心句型What is this? It is。。egg.在组织活动的过程中，要

引导学生与他人积极配合。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:书包、鸡蛋、球等实物，一套单词卡片((It, is, an, egg等单词和标点符号)，放单词卡片的盒子。

(2)学生准备:各学习小组准备一套能组成完整句子的单词、标点符号卡片及盒子。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①播放录音或多媒体课件，教师与学生一起唱第8课的歌曲“My Bag" a

②教师拿出准备好的书包问:What's this?学生回答:It's a bag.然后让学生猜:What's in the bag?学生根据已掌握知识进行回答。

③教师从包里拿出鸡蛋，学生做正确回答，鼓励学生寻找能组成答语的单词卡片，贝占到黑板上。在强调顺序的同时，引导学生观察句子开头单词的特点(开头字母要大写)以及结尾一定要有标点符号，为下面的活动做好示范。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:单词排队大比拼。

将班级分为几个小组

.%j.组都有一个放单同卡片的盒子，小组成员分r_合作，完成句子排序。如，教师拿出球问:What this?学生就需要找到1t, is, a.ball,，这几个单词和标点符一号的片片。教师及时做出鼓励性评价。用时最少

，并且读得最准确的小组获胜。板块四一Look, listen and do 1.设计意图

本板块的活动方式与板块三一样

，所不同的是学生需先重现教师的提问，再回答教师的问题

。既要培养学生认真倾听的习惯，又要使学生能整体感知重点

，既强调模仿又强调对问句的正确反应。‘ ‘模仿不走样” 的小活动重点复习巩对话固第

5课的核心句型Is this a box? Yes.2.课前准备

教师准备:能组成句子的单同卡片以及放单词卡片的盒子。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

可以与上一板块复习的核答方式。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:模仿不走样。

心句型整合在一起，对比感受两种问句的不同回同前一板块的游戏设计，将班级分为几个小组，每组都有一个放单词卡片的

盒子，小组成员分工找出能组成句子的单词，并排好顺序。注意这个游戏的要求

是听清教师的问题，将问题和答案一起找到并且排好顺序。用时最少，并且读得

最准确的小组获胜。教师需及时鼓励。

果猜中就将实物或单i司卡片送给该名学生作为奖励。

2.中英文标点的差异

中文常用的标点符号共有16种，英文的标点符号共有14种。中文标点和英

文标点有很多相似之处如句号、逗号、引号等10种标点符号是中文和英文都

有的。

中文目前使用的标点符号是参考和借鉴西文的标点体系而制定的，它既保

留了西文标点的主体特征，又带有自身鲜明的特点。因此，中英文标点符号之间

存在着一定的差异。

(1)中文的某些标点符号在英语中是没有的。

①顿号(、):顿号在汉语中起分割句子中并列成分的作用。英语中没有顿

号，分割句中的并列成分多用逗号。

②书名号(《》):英文没有书名号，书名、报刊名用斜体或者加引号表示。另

外，英语中文章、诗歌、乐曲、电影、绘画等的名称和交通工具、航天器等的专有名

词也常用斜体来表示。

③间隔号(·):中文有间隔号，用在月份和日期、音译的名和姓等需要隔开

的词语的正中间，如“一二·九”“奥黛丽·赫本”(人名)等。英语中没有汉语的间隔号，需要间隔时多用逗点。

④着重号():有时中文用在文字下点实心圆点表示需要强调的词语，这些实心点就是着重号。而英语中没有这一符号，需强调某些成分时可借助文字斜体、某些强调性词汇、特殊句型、标点停顿等多种方法。

①撇号(’):与s连用，表示名词的所有格和不定代词;表示词的缩写;与s连用，构成字母数字的复数形式等。

②连字号(一):标示行末音节断开，用于前缀和词根组合之间，用于复合词，定语位置上的修饰词组成部分之间，用于数字和年代之间等。

③斜线号(/):该符号主要起分割作用，也常用于标音。

(3)某些符号在汉英两种语言中的形式不同。

①中文的句号是空心圈(。)，英文的句号是实心点(.)。

②英文的省略号是三个点(二，)，位置在行底，中文的为六个点(..·„)，居于

行中。

③英文的破折号是(一)，中文的是(—)。

另外，斜体字和大写也起标示作用，功能与标点符一号类似，因此可以作为标点符号的一种。

3.desk与table的区别

在汉语中，这两个词都被称为“桌子”，而在英语中，它们的区别是非常明显的。desk通常指有抽屉的桌子，用于办公、读书、写字等，即“书桌”“写字台”“办公桌”。相比desk而言，table的含义更一般。单词table,《剑桥高级学习词典》给出的解释是“a flat surface, usually supported by four legs, used for putting things on"，即“通常由四条腿支撑，用来放东西的平面”，可视作“桌子”的统称，而 desk的含义则更具体。因此，tabl。是“种”，是‘一般”，而desk则是“属”，是“个别”。二者的区别，就像汉语中“树”与“杨树”的区别。

Leon

本课主要围绕着祈使句展开，如Show me a ball.Draw a desk.学生在第3课接触过简单的祈使句，本课是在语用层面上对祈使句教学的延续，通过学习，让学生进一步熟练地使用祈使句。

板块一Look, listen and say以图配文的形式呈现词汇，降低认知难度，为板块二提供词汇基础。

板块二Listen and do主要学习Show me a/an„及其应答Here it is.

板块三Listen and draw主要学习Draw a/an.并对Show me a/an...进行巩固练习。

板块四Touch and gue主要是对Is it a/an...?句型的复习，同时巩固本课所学的新单词。

四个板块在内容上有单词和句型的新旧融合，易于学生初步学习并运用祈使句，是对学生运用能力的提升。 1.知识目标

(I)能够听懂、会说face, cap, shoe这3个单词。

(2)能够了解祈使句的基本结构，能听懂、会说Show me a/an.二及Draw a/

an...两个指令，并对指令做出正确反应及回答

2.能力目标

(2)能够在活动中学会运用Show me a/an„及Draw a/an„两个指令，并对指令做出正确反应及回答。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

通过游戏来操练、巩固知识，并以此来激发学生乐于参与英语活动的兴趣，在活动中增强其竞争意识。板块一Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块以图配文的形式呈现词汇，使学生更直观地感知单词，为本课句型的

操练提供词汇基础，也给教师们提供了更大的教授空间。教师可以利用多种形

式来进行教学。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:所需单词的实物、卡片或多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:本板块6个单词的卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师在黑板上画出apple, egg, ball的简笔画，用What's this?进行提问，学生作答。

②教师继续画一个男孩或女孩的简笔画，人物要有cap, shoe(详见本课资源库)。教师引导学生说出This is a boy/girl.

③教师运用This is„句型向学生介绍This is his/her face.从而自然引出新授单词并进行操练，以同样方法学习。ap和shoeo

(2)活动设计建议 ①游戏:猜一猜、

该活动运用Is it a/an...}句型,2人一组猜单词，可用干单词的操练及运

用。学生2人一组，一名学生用一张事先准备好的卡片放在另一名学生身后，另一名学生则猜:Is it a/an...?出示卡片的学生根据其提问做出回答，以用最少次数猜对的学生获胜。

②游戏:火眼金睛。

该活动可使学生在猜的过程中练习单词，出示图片的一部分或出示遮住一部分的图片， an...?进行猜测。

，可用于单词的新授和操练部分。学生根据露出的部分运用Is it a/ 板块二

Listen and do

1.设计意图

本板块活动的设计结合教学场景突出本课的教学目标—祈使句，通过学

生的亲自操作，感受Here it is的语用功能。同时可以活跃课堂气氛，激发学生

课堂学习的热情。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:录音机、磁带、多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:自己做的本板块6个单词的卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①学生观察图片，听一遍录音，了解大意，明确文本中活动的规则。

②教师运用卡片演示Show me a/an„的用法，可以鼓励学生多使用 please，并引导学生做出正确反应或回答Here it is.

③学生听录音跟读两遍，教师纠正学生发音。

④用学生手中的卡片，按照文本中的活动规则进行师生互动练习，然后再由学生试着下指令，最后同桌之间进行练习。

(2)活动设计建议。

①同桌两人共用一套卡片进行比赛，教师发出指令后，最先拿到卡片并能正

确回答的学生获胜。

②4人一组.轮流下指令，其余3人进行比赛。

1.设计意图

本板块结合所学词汇和祈使句句型，设计课堂绘画活动，手口脑并用，寓教于乐，在第二板块学生会说的基础上，进一步让学生动手做，从而体现能力培养的渐进性。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:大“井字格’，及其相应的图片、录音机、磁带、多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:一个空白的“井字格”。里

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师边画边说:Draw an apple.让学生先理解draw的意思。

②学生观察图片，听一遍录音，了解大意，进一步体会Draw a/an„这一指

令的意思及用法。

③学生听录音跟读两遍，教师纠正学生发音。

④教师下指令，学生画出相应的图，指令中的单词最好简单易画。

(2)活动设计建议。

①快速记忆。

该活动让学生乐于开口。快速记忆的活动具有一定的挑战性，可以提高学生参与的积极性，可用于操练或运用部分。

教师在所学单词及本课的新单词中选取9个易画的单词，提前用一张大纸将这9个单词的图画在“井字格”中。学生2人一组，一名学生背对图片，另一名学生快速记忆每个图片位置，数秒钟后教师收起图片。负责记忆的学生运用祈

使句Draw a/an二指挥同伴在“井字格”中的相应位置inii出正确的图在规定时间内imi出与教师出示的图片位置相同的图的数量多的小组获胜

②游戏;心有灵犀。

学生吐人一组，教师对每人各下一条不同的指令，t人根据指令在纸上画出相应的图。教师提示学生吐张图要分别画在田字格中，自己决定具体位置。验证所画的图是否与指令相符，并看是否有4幅位置相同的图，相同者即为“心有灵犀”。

板块四1Touch and gue

1.设计意图

学生在第5课初次接触Is it a/a二二?这一句型时，就已经有了把具体物品和

单词联系到一起的能力。本板块如此设计是为了巩固学过的单词，让学生在熟悉

的语境中复习，更加生动有趣地复现单词，体现了本教材螺旋式复现的特点。

2课前准备

教师准备:一些学过的名词的卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

本板块为大家提供了一个操练is it a/an...?句型的场景，可以模拟该情景让学生也去摸一摸，猜一猜，但在操作时都用实物有些不现实，而且物品种类也会受限，可参照以下活动设计建议。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:闪卡记忆。

该活动在课堂上易操作，并具有一定的趣味性，能够让学生在活动中使用英语，适用于导人、操练或运用部分。

教师出示一张名词卡片，学生说出单词后将卡片翻过来贴在黑板的任意位置，按此方法将多张卡片翻贴在黑板上。贴好后，教师指着其中一张，请学生凭记忆猜:Is it a/an...?教师可以多请几名学生猜，然后公布答案。之后再依次猜其他卡片的内容。

②可与板块一进行整合，也可采用相同的方法进行操练。

Leon

本课围绕询问他人名字、性别、身份的一般疑问句Are you...?展开，如Are you Ann? Are you a girh Are you a pupil?而接下来将连续三课学习该句型，因此掌握好本课内容也能为后面的学习奠定好基础。

板块‘Listen, act and answer主要通过击鼓传花的游戏使学生学会用 Are you..?猜测他人的名字。

板块二Listen and gue通过一个学生喜欢的活动，在第一板块的基础上引导学生学会用Are you...?猜测他人的性别。

板块三Look, listen and say通过网络聊天的形式，在板块一和板块二的基础上引导学生继续将Are you...?延伸为猜测他人的身份。

三个板块设计均以活动为主，活动围绕话题和主要句型展开，层层递进，贴近学生生活，能激发学生运用英语的兴趣。 1.知识目标

(1)能听懂、会说指令Go! Stop! (2)能够听懂、会说Are you a boy? Are you a pupil? 2.能力目标

(1)能够运用Are you二?询问他人的名字、性别及身份。

(2)能够准确模仿录音内容。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

激发学生学习英语的兴趣，乐于模仿，敢于开口。积极与他人合作，共同完成学习任务，体会英语学习中的快乐。板块一{Listen, act and answer

1.设计意图

该板块活动设计简单易操作，语言也较简洁，配上清晰的图画可使学生快速

了解活动的规则，为后面Are you...?的继续学习做了很好的铺垫。

2.课前准备

教师准备:布艺小玩偶(任何一种可以传递的物品)、磁带、录音机、多媒体

课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师可用听指令做动作的游戏来使学生们熟悉Go! Stop!这两个指令，如教师说:Go !学生可在原地踏步，教师说:Stop!学生则停止不动。

②学生熟悉这两个指令后，教师背对大家，选择一个大组进行示范，教师说: Go!学生开始按顺序传递小玩偶。教师说:Stop!拿到小玩偶的学生迅速将其放到书桌里。教师转身用新句型Are you...?猜测，并引导学生回答Yes./No.反复运用该句型，直到猜对。

③教师板书Are you...?并讲解其用法，然后学生听录音模仿文本。

④学生在掌握了Are you...?句型后，继续按照文本内容进行活动，可采用小组互猜的方式，猜的次数最少的小组获胜。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:猜猜他是谁。

猜一猜的活动能够充分调动学生参与的积极性，适用于操练或拓展环节。

①出示IL张有特点的、学’!熟悉的人物图片，如姚明、小沈1111竹，将他们的失遮住，学生运川/1rc you‘二?进行猜测。

②让一名学生代件图片中的人物回答·建议教师可选择儿个有挑.贬I0I-的人物图片

1.设计意图

本板块通过一个学生熟悉并且感兴趣的课外小活动，i卜学，}几继续感知八re

you...?使学生了解如何用这一句型猜测他人的性别。本板块设计符合学生的

实际生活经验，具有很强的操作性。

2.课前准备

教师准备:磁带、录音机、多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1>板块内容教学建议。

①通过课件或挂图给学生呈现文本内容，然后播放录音.让学生看一看，听

一听，了解活动规则。

②播放第二遍录音，学生找出含有Are you...?的句子并试着读出这些句

子，同时引导学生了解Are you...?也可用来猜测他人性别。

③播放第三遍录音，学生跟读，然后小组内练习朗读并表演。

④让学生下课后4至6人一组练习该活动，下节课时请几组表演。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:请你猜猜我是谁。

该活动符合学生的年龄特点，能调动学生学习的积极性，又能进一步使用所学新句型。

选一名学生背对其他同学，另一名学生可变换声音跟其打招呼，背对的学生根据声音判断打招呼的同学。教师要注意指导学生运用Are you...?并从性别开始猜。

板块三}Look, listen and say 1.设计意图

本板块为学生提供了另外一个进一步运用Are you...?的情景，在学习中

又加人了如何猜测他人身份的内容，而且本场景的设置具有时代特征，贴近学生

实际生活，符合学生认知特点。

2.课前准备

教师准备:磁带、录音机、多媒体课件、挂图。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师可根据自己和学生们的身份直接引出pupil和teacher，并进行讲解及

练习。

②出示本部分挂图，学生听一遍文本录音，了解其大意。

③由于Are you...?句型在前两个板块已进行了充分操练，可让学生直接跟读录音，或同桌之间进行练习和表演。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:找朋友。

该活动既能使学生学会运用，又能锻炼学生写的能力，是一个综合性的拓展活动。

教师在黑板上写出4个人名、3种身份或职业以及2种性别。学生选择不同类单词，运用lam.../lama.../lama„来完成自己的名。每名学生

对照自己的名片问其他同学:Are you a boy/girl?如相同，可继续问，如果不

同，再去问另一个同学，最多问5人，看能否找到与自己同性别、同职业、同名的好朋友。

Leon

本课围绕Iam二句型展开，并在此基础上学习表示感觉的形容词。在前面几课的学习中，学生已学会使用I am„介绍自己的名字及身份，本板块是在语用上对前面学习的延伸。

板块一Look, listen and say通过一个男孩患感冒的过程，学习不同感觉的表达方式，功能句为I am...

板块二Look, listen and act通过一个幽默的情景对话来学习表达感觉的肯定句、否定句、一般疑问句及回答。

板块三Ask and answer通过具体情境巩固Are you...?句型及表示感觉的形容词。

三个板块均提供了相应的情景，在内容上层层递进，并对所学内容进行及时复习与巩固。 1.知识目标

(2)能够听懂、会说、认读句子I am hot/cold八fired/ill/fine. Are you...? I am not...

2，能力目标

(1)能够用英语表达自己的感觉，如冷、热、饥饿等。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

通过本课学习，鼓励学生关心他人，同时让学生勇于表达、乐于表达自己的感觉.提高学习英语的兴趣，培养学生合作学习的意识。板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块通过一个男孩患感冒的过程来学习如何表达自己的感觉，每一个过

程配有相应的图片，图文并茂，使学生学习起来更直观、形象。本板块的设计也

为教师提供了教育学生要爱惜自己身体的契机。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:磁带、录音机、多媒体课件。

C2)学生准备:含有本板块新单词的卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①学生观察图片，听录音，猜测每幅图片的意思。

②教师讲解每幅图中的生词，并反复练习。

③学生整体掌握该板块意思后，听录音，跟读两遍，注意模仿语音语调。

④教师单独出示文本中的一幅图，然后说一句话，学生进行判断。

⑤学生逐图练习句子，进而能够完全复述文本。在练习时可采取小组竞赛的方式，以增加练习的趣味性。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:猜一猜。

学生6人一组，准备有提示词的6张单词卡片，每人抽一张卡片，6人根据自

己所抽卜片按文本内容顺序排列好·然后按顺序说出自己所抽词卡的完整句f 教师可让两组同学同时进行比赛。

②游戏:小法官。

出示配有句子图片的课件，句子与图片可以不相符。出示后，学生快速判断图片与句子是否相符，如果相符大声读出句子，不相符则不能读。板块二一Look, listen and act

1设计意图

板块二的设计是一个幽默情景小对话，虽然只出现了一种感觉，但简短几句话却显示出如何询问他人感觉及表达自己的感觉，呈现的是板块一所学句型的一般疑问句和否定句的形式，并配肯定回答，是对前一个板块的延伸和提升。

2.课前准备

教师准备:磁带、录音机、多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

C1)板块内容教学建议。

①学生2人一组复述板块一的文本，复习表达感觉的单词及句型I'm.二

②教师边做动作边说I am hungry now.出示hungry单词卡片并进行讲解练习。

③教师反问学生:Are you hungry?引导学生做出相应回答，教师可多问几名学生。

④学生听录音，根据图片内容了解对话的含义。

⑤教师讲解I am not„的含义，并结合第一板块所学单词进行操练。

⑥学生听录音跟读两遍，然后同桌两人进行表演。

①歌曲。

教师把所学的内容利用学生熟悉的“Are you sleeping?”的乐曲编成歌曲。

Are you hungry? Are you hungry?

Brother John, Brother John.

Mother gives you some bread.Mother gives you some bread.

Here you are[ Here you arc!

②可鼓励学生根据该板块刘话及所学单词，充分发挥想象，以小组为单位创建新的对话，并让学生到讲台上进行表演。蔽瑛三万Ask and answ屯三

1.设计意图

本板块是对板块一的单同及板块二的句型进行综合运用，对两个板块进行

了适当的整合，有利于学生对所学知识的巩固。为了在具体情境中操练之前学

过的语言，教师可以按照课本上的游戏形式进行，也可以自己创设情境。操练的

主要目标语言为Are you...? Yes./No.操练过程中，教师应尽可能多地创设不

同情境，使学生加深对所学句型的理解。

2.课前准备

教师和学生准备:I, Are, you, am的单词卡片、表示感觉的单词卡片及标点

符号(问号和句号)卡片。

3.教学建议

(1>板块内容教学建议。

学生对该板块单词与句型都已熟悉，需要教师尽可能多地创设不同情境，引导学生更好地运用所学知识。如教师可以创设体育课结束后，学生们都回到教室时的情境。教师自然引出Are you tired/...?学生可根据实际情况进行回答。

学生4人一组，发挥自己的想象力，创设不同情境进行练习，并请几个小组上台表演。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:排队造句。

该游戏可以用来巩固所学句型及单词。学生4人一组，教师和每个组各准备I, Are, you, am及表示感觉的单词卡片和标点符号(问号、句号)卡片。教师说一个句子，各小组根据听到的句子快速从卡片中找出相应的单词及标点，并按正确的顺序排好。最先完成的小组起立进行展示。

Leon

本课主要围绕职业类单词和简单的一般疑问句展开教学，如Are you a

doctors Are you a nurse?在第10课学生已经学过Are you...?这一句型，所以

不会有陌生感。本课是对第10课的延伸，继续学习如何询问他人身份或职业。

板块一Look, listen and say学习职业类单词，其中driver, doctor, nurse

这3个单词为新授词。

板块二Look, listen and gue通过看一看、听一听、猜一猜的活动，让学生学会运用Are you a...?并会用Yes, I am.或No, I'm not.做出回答。

板块三Look, listen and say通过例词girl, bag, dog, hot, head, hand 教授字母Gg和Hh，要求学生能听、说、读、写字母Gg和Hh，并初步掌握字母在例词中的准确发音。

板块一与板块二在内容上相互衔接，易于学生整体掌握职业类单词及相关的一般疑问句。 1.知识目标

(1)能够听懂、会说、认读driver, doctor和nurse这3个单词。 (2)能够听懂、会说、认读句型Are you a...?Yes, I am./No, I'm not.

(3)能够听、说、读、写字母c}}和日ho

2.能力目标

C1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

帮助学生了解一些职业的辛苦，培养学生感恩父母、感恩社会的情感板块一}Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块图文并茂、形象直观，学生很容易意识到这是几个职业类单词以及与之有关的图片。之前已经学过teacher, pupil和farmer，本板块又延伸到1driver, nurse和doctor，与学生的实际生活密切相关。希望通过本板块的学习，让学生学会正确使用常见的职业类单词。

2.课前准备

(1>教师准备:磁带、录音机、多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:小组4人准备6张该板块的单词卡片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

该板块中学生已熟悉teacher, pupil, farmer，可由旧词旧句来学习新词，如用I am a teacher/„进行本课新词的学习。学习过程中要注重让学生听录音模仿的环节，在操练过程中教师可通过开火车、爬楼梯、小组比赛等活动增加学习的趣味性。

教师应渗透职业特点的教育，引导学生感恩父母，尊重别人的职业。

(2)活动设计建议。

①歌谣。

教师可以编一首歌谣和学生一起来诵读，这既可增加学习的趣味性，又便于

记忆一单词。

teacher，teache:是教师，teacher要求很严格;

driver, driver是司机·driver开车很仔细;

farmer, farmer是农民，farmer种田很辛苦;

doctor, doctor是医生，doctor医术很高明;

nurse, nurse是护士，nurse工作很细心;

pupil, pupil小学生，pupil学习很用心。

②游戏:我是一个„„

学生4人一组，每人从提前准备好的卡片中随意抽一张，根据所抽取卡片的

内容做动作，并说出I am a...

③游戏:看一看、演一演。

教师用肢体语言来演示不同职业的特征，让学生猜猜教师演示的职业是什么，边猜边练习。然后学生与教师互换，教师说一个职业类的单词，学生表演动作，然后让同桌看着猜。这个游戏符合孩子们的年龄特点，很受欢迎。本板块可用于操练或输出环节。

板块二{Look, listen and gue

1.设计意图

该板块通过简单的肢体活动将新学单词融人句型Are you a...?中，为板块

一中的单词提供了语用环境，也是对Are you...?句型的延伸运用，并且易于营

造活跃的课堂气氛，增加学生学习英语的兴趣。

2.课前准备

教师准备:录音机、磁带、表示职业的图片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

教师让一名学生做有职业特点的动作，教师用Are you a...?猜测并引导这名学生回答Yes, I am./No, I'm not.然后教师让学生观察文本中的图，听录音了解文本中的学生是如何对职业进行猜测的。让学生跟读两遍录音后，教师可

让学生按文本中的活动进行练习，也可让学生分组进行表演。

(2)活动设计建议

①游戏:你演我猜。

学生2人一组，一人做动作，另一人运用该板块所学单词及句型进行猜测。

②游戏:盖图片，猜一猜。

教师准备本课表示职业的图片，请一名学生任选一张，然后用另外一张白纸遮住图片的一部分。其他学生可根据露出的部分进行猜测Are you a...?持图

片的学生做出相应回答，如猜错，可逐步减少遮挡部分直到有学生猜对为止。本活动可以教师先示范，学生再练习，可用于操练环节。而及三厂Look, listen and say一

1.设计意图

板块三通过例词教字母Gg和Hh，该板块相对独立。在本板块中教师可以

指导学生通过观察例词，掌握字母在例词中的准确发音和规范书写。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:字母卡片、录音机、磁带。

(2)学生准备:作业本。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师播放2个字母的录音，让学生模仿。

②教师出示字母卡Gg和Hh，学生认读，然后播放录音。学生跟读，教师注意纠正学生的发音。教师应引导学生注意字母的音形结合。

③教师板书示范并讲解书写要领，学生随教师的示范进行书空。然后，学生进行书写练习，教师指导。

④教师播放单词录音，让学生体会字母在单词中的发音。如:G is for girl/ bag/dog.H is for hot/head/hand.

⑤让学生进行小组活动，讨论含有相同发音的单词，并进行展示汇报。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:单词人。

Leon

学生在第1课已经学过用I am„进行自我介绍，在第8课学过用This is a/ an„介绍物品。本课继续学习介绍他人的表达方法This is Peter. He is Peter.She is Ann.

板块一Look, listen and say学习介绍他人，功能句为This is...

板块二Listen, draw and gue通过画一画，猜一猜“他/她是谁?”这一游戏，学会用wh。进行询问，并用He/She is„做出回答。

板块三Look, listen and say通过例词ice cream, ship, juice, jump教授

字母Ii和JJ，要求学生能听、说、读、写Ii和Jj这两个字母，并掌握其在例词中的准确发音。

板块一在语境中呈现词汇和句型，学习使用This is„介绍他人，尤其是刚认识的人。板块二进一步学习用He/She is„对不同性别的人做具体的介绍。 1.知识目标

(1)能够听、说、认读单词ice cream, (2)能够听懂、会用句型This is...(3)能够听、说、读、写字母Ii和Jja ship, juice, jump, he, she, whop Who? He/She is...

2.能力目标

(1>能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2>能够在实际情境中用This，、„介绍他人。

(3)能够用Who?询问不认识的人是谁，井用H刁She is„做正确的回答。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

培养学生乐于用This is... He is... She is„这些句型介绍他人的兴趣，并且养成在认识新朋友后和对方互相问好的良好习惯。板块一1Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块图文并茂、情境清晰，学生很容易观察到图中教师是在介绍学生的名

字。之前学生已经学过用This is a/an„介绍物品，在本板块延伸到用This

is„介绍他人，自然过渡。本板块旨在帮助学生学会This is„句型，这一句型

既可以用来介绍物品，也可以用来介绍人。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:人物头饰、录音机、磁带、光盘、多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:英文名字卡。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师戴Mi Li头饰，用Good morning! Hello!与全班学生互相问候，让学生自然进人板块学习情境。

②教师出示Peter头饰，用This is Peter.向学生介绍新同学，再将各位学生介绍给Peter，并引导学生与Peter互相打招呼问好。

③教师播放录音，让学生通过看一看、听一听，整体感知本板块的对话，初步理解This is„的含义，并且跟读录音。

④分角色扮演或朗读是学生喜欢的练习形式。本板块有3个角色，可以分3

组进行角色扮演或朗读;也可以3人组进行，

(2)IT动设i-t建议。

①游戏:英文名字卡。

教师可在课前让学生制作一张写有自己英文名字的卡片，戴在胸前。教师引导学生进行小组活动，练习介绍他人的英文名字，这样既可以比较自然合理地让学生练习This is.句型，也可以让学生因为自己拥有英文名字而对英语更加感兴趣。

②游戏:听音猜名字。

让一名学生背对其他学生站到讲台上，随意请台下一名学生说:Hello! CTood morning!台上的学生根据听到的声音，用This is„句型猜测。板块二{Listen, draw and gue

1.设计意图

本板块是新授内容，通过画一画、猜一猜的游戏方式呈现语言，让学生学习

用Who?询问，并用He/She is„回答所猜测的内容，进一步学习介绍他人的句

型。学生第一次接触he和she，教师应引导学生注意两者的不同，并强化练习。教材中设计的这个游戏适合学生的年龄特征，趣味性强，能调动学生的学习兴趣。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:本课主要人物的头饰、录音机、磁带、光盘、多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:个人照片一张。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师与学生用英语互相问好，使用This is„介绍几名学生的英文名，让学生与被介绍的学生互相打招呼。

②教师向学生介绍课本上的情境，即Mi Li正在与学生做“画一画，猜一猜”的游戏。

③让学生观察课本上的前两幅图，教师先用Who?提问，然后用板块一所学句型This is Peter/Ann.的疑问语气询问学生。将人物头像贴到黑板上，然后播

放录音让学生听录音寻找答案。

④学生很容易通过录音中Mi 1_，的回答得到答案。然后，再让学生学习He is I'e}cr./She i、八nn.学生第一次接触he和she,教师应注意引导学生进行Ix_ 分。

⑤教师应特别重视学生模仿录音跟读文本，为学生学习新知识打下良好基础。可在学生跟录音读两三遍之后，让学生在小组内进行角色扮演，充分练习，然后让几个小组到讲台前展示。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:画一画，猜一猜。

在教授板块内容之后，教师与学生可再现语用情境。

让一名学生在黑板上画另一名同学，在画的过程中，老师用Who?提问。其余学生猜测并用He/She is„回答，老师要及时表扬猜对的学生。也可以学生开展小组活动进行操练，并给大家展示。

②游戏:盖照片，猜一猜。

考虑到用画画方式表现学生特征有一定困难，课堂操作性不强。教师可让学生提前准备一张个人照片，用照片做猜一猜的游戏。教师在多媒体课件上呈现一张被部分遮挡住的照片进行示范，用W ho?提

问，学生猜测并用He/She 止。根据学生掌握的情况

is„回答，可逐步减少遮挡部分直到有学生猜对为，教师可示范一到两张照片。也可以让学生利用自带的照片，通过遮挡部分照片的方式，进行小组活动。

③游戏:看视频，说人名。

教师在多媒体课件上呈现名人集锦视频，用Who?提问，让学生用He/ She is..，回答。

板块三}Look, listen and say 1.设计意图

板块三通过例词教授字母

Ii和J}。该板块相对独立，教师在本板块可以指

导学生通过观察例词，掌握字母在例词中的准确发音和规范书写。 2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:字母卡片、录音机、磁带、光盘、多媒体课件。

cz)学生r了i备:作、i1-本。

3.教学建议

‘”板块内容教学建议。

①教师播放字母Ii和Jj的录音，让学生模仿。

②教师出示Ii和Jj字母卡片，学生认读，然后播放录音，学生跟读，教师注意

纠正学生的发音。教师应引导学生注意字母的音形结合

③教师板书示范并讲解书写要领，学生跟随教师示范过程进行书空。然后，

学生进行书写练习，教师指导。

④教师播放单词录音，让学生体会字母在单词中的发音。如:I曰s for ice

cream/ship. Jj is for juice/jump.

⑤让学生进行小组活动，通过讨论，找出含有相同发音的单词，并进行展示汇报。

(2)活动设计建议。

①游戏:字母找朋友。

将学生分成4人一组，分给每个小组一些含有字母Ii和Ji的单词卡片和分别写着字母Ii和Jj的两张纸。教师不断发出八/和/d3/的音，学生迅速将发音相

同的单词卡片分别放到写有I或J的纸上。

②听音辨字母。

这是一个训练学生辨别字母的游戏。教师可将之前学过的字母A至J分别写在纸板上，共准备2至4套，同时将学生分成2至4个小组，每组出一名学生到讲台上面向全班站好。教师发给每人一套卡片，教师念其中的一个字母，学生应立即找出并高举起该字母，先找对的得2分，后找对的得1分，没找对的不得分，最后得分多的组获胜。

Leon

学生在第13课已经学过用Who?简单询问他人是谁，本课进一步学习用 Who is she?询问某位女士是谁，并用She is二回答。

板块一Look, listen and say学习新句型Who is she? She is Mi/Mrs...

板块二Ask and answer从语用的角度，在学习板块一的基础上，让学生练习使用Who is she? She is Mi/Mrs...

板块三Look, listen and say通过book, kite, desk, ruler, leg, table这

些例词教授字母Kk和L1，要求学生能听、说、读、写Kk和L1这2个字母，并掌握其在例词中的准确发音。

板块一在语境中呈现词汇和句型，学习如何询问并介绍某位女士。板块二继续巩固练习板块一所学内容。 1.知识目标

(1)能够听、说、认读Mrs, kite, leg这3个单词。

(2)能够听懂、会说句型:Who is she? She is Mi/Mrs...(3)能够听、说、读、写字母Kk和L10 2.能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2)能够在实际情境‘I，少IJ WI、。、、}hr? i}}) I'n某位女士是准·}i能111 si,a、、Mi/Mrs„回答。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

培养学生礼貌对待女_I泊勺好习惯。学生应学会区分并正确使用Mina/Mrs.在与外国女士交流时，称呼应更加准确，表现出对对方的礼貌和尊重。板块一{Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

本板块通过让学生观察6幅不同女士的照片学习新知识。在上一课，学生已经学过用Who?简单询问他人是谁，并用He/She is„做出回答。本板块延伸到学习用Who is she?询问某位女士是谁，并用She is Mi/Mrs„回答。

2.课前准备

教师准备:教学挂图、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师与全班同学用英语互相问候。

②教师在多媒体课件上呈现Mi Li的图片，将面部遮挡住一部分，引起学生的好奇心。教师用Who?来询问，引导学生猜测并用She is„回答。然后将第一幅图片完整地展示给学生，给出答案She is Mi Li.教师在询问过程中，可自然将Who?拓展到板上。

③播放课文录音

Who is she?然后，把Who is she? She is Mi Li.板书到黑，让学生一边听一边圈出课文中出现的Miy

④让学生说出找到的含有Mi的称谓，教师在多媒体课件上呈现课文截图，随着学生的回答将4个Mi依次圈出，并且在给出每个答案之后，引导学生跟录音读Who is she? She is Mi，二句型。

⑤引导学生观察图画，跟他们解释Mi和Mrs的区别。教师可出示本班任

课女教师的照片，让学生感知Mr、和Mis、的区别反川法。然后，播放含有M}r

的对话录音.iL学生跟读。

⑥教师播放完整课文录音·让学生跟录音读两一遍。然后让学生2人‘81I 进行一I}fl」一答对话练习，再让学生分儿个小组进行展小。

(2)活动设计建议。

①认一认，说一说。

教师在多媒体课件上随机出示课文r_的图m，并用W ho，、She?进行询问，请学生辨认并回答She is Mrs/Mi..

②游戏:猜一猜，说一说。

让一名学生到讲台前从6张教学挂图中随机抽取一张，并用Who is she?提问，其他学生用She is Mrs/Mi„句型进行猜测。教师表扬或奖励猜对的学生。

板块二}Ask and answer

1.设计意图

本板块是板块一的拓展操练部分，旨在通过一系列活动和游戏，使学生对板块一所学知识的掌握更加牢固，并能在实际情境中运用。

2.课前准备

(1)教师准备:教学挂图、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:女性名人照片、女性家人照片。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师与全体学生用英语互相问候，并询问学生上节课认识了几位女士。学生会回答5位或者6位(因为Mi Li前几课已经见过，所以可能学生答案不一致)。

②教师邀请一名学生与自己一起做示范，出示板块一6张图中的一张问 Who is she?学生用She is Mrs/Mi„回答。教师可根据学生学习情况示范1 到3次。

③让学生2人一组用图片进行问答练习，然后小组进行展示。

C2)活动设计建议。

①介绍朋友。

教师出示几张女士的)3}i片i I-学生用Who is she?问，教师)}j She is Mrs/

M，、„回答。

②游戏:遮一遮，猜一猜。

教师准备一些女教师的照片，在多媒体上呈现一张被部分遮挡住的照片，用

Who is she?提问，引导学生猜测并用She is Mi/Mrs...C}1答可逐步减少遮

挡部分直到有学生猜对为止，要及时表扬猜对的学生。可根据学生掌握的情况，

示范一到三张照片。也可以让学生利用自带的女性名人照片，通过部分遮挡的

方式，进行小组活动，让学生练习使用Who is she?提问。用She is Mi/Mrs...

回答。

③介绍家人。

教师选择学生准备的一张女性家人的照片，用Who is she提问，照片的主

人用She is Mrs/Mi„回答。可根据学生掌握的情况，提问1到3张照片。也

可以让学生4人一组拿出准备好的女性家人的照片，用Who is she? She is Mrs/

Mi二进行问答练习，通过交流，加深了解。匡巫工Look一一listen and say口

1.设计意图

板块三通过例词教授字母Kk和L1。该板块相对独立，教师在本板块可以指导学生通过观察例词，掌握字母在例词中的准确发音和规范书写。

2.课前准备

教师准备:字母卡片、录音机和磁带、光盘和多媒体课件。

(2)学生准备:作业本。

3.教学建议

(1)板块内容教学建议。

①教师播放字母Kk和LI的录音，让学生模仿。

②教师出示Kk和LI字母卡片，让学生认读，然后播放录音，让学生跟读，注意纠正学生的发音。教师应引导学生注意字母的音形结合。

③教师板书示范并讲解书写要领，学生随教师不范过程进行书空然后，学生进行书写练习，教师指导。

④教师播放单同录音，让学生体会字母在单词中的发音。如:Kk is for book/kite/desk. Ll is for ruler/leg/table.

⑤让学生进行小组活动，讨论并找出含有相同发音的单词，然后进行展示汇报。

(2)活动设计建议。

游戏:摘苹果，学字母。

①教师在黑板上画一棵苹果树，准备一些粘有磁条的苹果，贴在苹果树上。每个苹果上有一个含有字母k或I的单词，然后在黑板上画2个篮子，分别把 book和table写在2个篮子上。

②让两名学生到讲台前面来，把树上的苹果摘下来，将含有与book或table 相同发音的单词放人相应的篮子里，最快最准确的学生获胜。

教学小帖士

Mi用来称呼未婚女士，Mrs用来称呼已婚女士。Ms是指女士，可用在不清楚对方是否已婚的情况下。

据说，Ms是上世纪美国女权运动的产物，其实是由Mrs与Mi合成而来，目前已被广泛使用，常见于社交公务活动及往来函件中。当然，也有一些女士，尤其是在正式场合，愿意他人使用Mi或Mrs称呼自己。

一般来说，Mi后加该女士的姓，Mrs后加该女士丈夫的姓。但要注意的是，Mrs和Mi可以和政府官员的职衔连用，如:Mrs Premier(总理夫人);还可以与地方、运动或职业的名称连用，如:Mrs America(美国太太，指已婚妇女的选美冠军),Mi World(世界小姐)。

Leon

学生已经在第12课学过用Are you a...?询问职业，在第14课学过用Who

is she?询问女士是谁，并用She is„回答。本课继续学习如何询问某位男士是

谁，及如何回答，用来介绍男士及其职业。

板块一Look, listen and say学习介绍男士及其职业，功能句为H e is

Mr... He is a...

板块二Ask and answer从语用角度设计，在学习板块一的基础上，使用 Who is he? He is Mr...He is a..，进行问答对话。

板块三Look, listen and say通过例词farmer, monkey, nurse, nose教

授字母Mm和Nn，要求学生能听、说、读、写Mm和Nn这2个字母，并掌握其在例词中的准确发音。

板块四Listen and chant通过学习歌谣"ABC"，巩固字母A,B,C,E,F, G,L,M,No

板块一学习如何介绍男士及其职业。板块二在板块一的基础上，学习使用 Who is he?询问某位男士是谁，再使用板块一所学内容进行回答。 1.知识目标

(1)能够听、说、认读Mr, monkey, nose这3个单词。

(2)能够听懂、会说句型Who is he`s He is Mr...I-le，、:，„

(3)能够听、说、读、写字母Mm和Nno

2.能力目标

(1)能够准确模仿本课录音中的内容。

(2)能够在实际情境中用Who is he?询问某位男士是谁。

(3)能够在实际情境中用He is Mr...He is a„介绍男士及其职业。

3.情感态度，文化意识，学习策略

培养学生乐于用所学的英语介绍他人及其职业的兴趣，引导学生树立职业公平意识，养成良好的职业观。板块一Look, listen and say

1.设计意图

推荐第10篇：全英英语教师求职信

830 Shanghai Road

Zunyi , Guizhou 563000

May 30,2012

Mack

219 Beijing Road

Kaili, Guizhou 561000

Dear Sir or Madame :

I am writing in response to your ad in the zhaopin.com for a position listed as junior middle school English teacher .I believe my stable-based English knowledge and abundant experience make me an excellence candidate for this position.

I graduated from Zunyi Normal College and I nearly spent 12 years on the elementary and comprehensive study, then 4 years on the major study of English .Especially through the 4 years’ English study, I have gained in-depth knowledge of many English subjects which include Integrated skills of English, Pronunciation and Intonation of English, Oral English, Extensive Reading ,Courses in English literature, English Writing, Listening , Translation, Course in English Grammar, Linguistics, etc.

Concerning my related experience, I had been employed as a part-time teacher in the foreign language training school for elementary and junior middle school students more than one time .In those position ,I not only taught students English (including Oral English, Grammar, Pronunciation, etc.) but also in charge of them.Thanks to such experience, I learned how to use a comprehensible way to explain complicated problem, and develop superior interpersonal skills between teacher and students and among colleagues.

I plan to use my employment in the English teaching field and make good use of what I have learnt about English.To be a teacher is my dream throughout the first 21 years.

Enclosed is a resume that provides more details about my background.I am very excited by an opportunity such as the one you advertised.Though I am in short of experience in some special field, I am ready to seize the chance to test myself.I am1

young, energetic and eager to learn something new and challengeable, I am willing to study harder than others, and absorb others’ strengths to make up for my shortcomings.I sincerely hope I could do a favor to your school.

May you and your school a more promising and prosperous future!

Sincerely,

( signature )

Lily

Applicant

Enclosure: resume

第11篇：小学英语全英说课稿

英语全英说课稿

（一）

Intepetation

Good moning, ladies and gentlemen.It’s my geat hono and pleasue to be hee shaing my leon with you.I have been eady to begin this epesentation with five pats.Analysis of the teaching mateial, the teaching aims, the impotant and difficult points, the studying methods, and the teaching pocedue.

Pat 1 Teaching Mateial

The content of my leon is New Senio English fo China Book___ Unit____________________.This unit is about____________________ （topics）。 By studying of this unit, we’ll enable students to know_________________________ and develop the inteest in___________________.At the same time, let the students lean how to____________________ （functional items）。 Fom this leon, it stats___________________________（stuctues）。（As we all know, eading belongs to the input duing the poce of the language leaning.The input has geat effect on output, such as speaking and witing.） Theefoe, this leon is in the impotant position of this unit.If the Ss can maste it well, it will be helpful fo them to lean the est of this unit.

Pat 2 Teaching Aims

Accoding to the new standad cuiculum and the syllabus （新课程标准和教学大纲）， and afte studying the teaching mateial, the teaching aims ae the followings:

1.Knowledge objects （语言目标：语音，词汇，语法，功能，话题）

（1）The Ss can maste the usage of the impotant wods and expeions.

（2）The Ss can use the __________________ （gamma） in the pope situation.

（3）The Ss can undestand the content of the leon, talk about _______________________ （infomation） and get thei own idea about _______________________________.

2.Ability objects （技能目标：听，说，读，写）

（1） To develop the Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, eading and witing

（2） To guide Ss to set up effective studying stategies.

（3） To impove the student’s eading ability, especially thei skimming and scanning ability.

（4） To tain the Ss’ abilities of studying by themselves and coopeating .

3.Emotion o moal objects （情感目标：兴趣，自信，合作，爱国，国际视野）

（1）By completing the task, the Ss incease thei inteest in ____________________and set up self-confidence in _____________________.

（2）Teach the Ss_________________________, put the moal education in the language study.

Pat 3 the Impotant and Difficult Points

Based on the equiement of the syllabus.

The impotant points ae__________________________ such as ______________.

The difficult points ae_________________________ fo example_____________.

Pat 4 Teaching Methods

As is known to us all, a good teaching method equies that the teache should help Ss develop good sense of the English language.Fo achieving these teaching aims, （afte the analysis of the teaching mateial and teaching aims,） I will use the following methods accoding to the moden social communication teaching theoies（现代社会交际教学理论） .

1.Communicative Appoach（交际教学法）

2.Whole Language Teaching（整体语言教学法）

3.Task-based Language Teaching （任务教学法）

4.Total Situational Action （情景教学） a \"scene — activity\" teaching method , it establishes a eal scene and the inteaction between the teache and the Ss.At the same time, CAI （电脑辅助教学） can povide a eal situation with its sound and pictue, it can develop the Ss ceativity in leaning English.

Pat 5 Teaching Pocedue

Step 1.Lead-in.（_____min）

___________________________________________________________________

Pupose of my design: （1） to catch Ss’ attention about the cla/topic/paage.

（2） To set up suspense/develop inteest in _______________.

Step 2.Pe-eading

Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Let Ss _____________________________________________________________

Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

___________________________________________________________________

Now, let’s see what happened to the_______________/ let’s check whethe it is ight o not.

Pupose of my design: （1） to get to know something about the _________________.

（2） To have a bette undestanding about the impotance of ___________________.

Step 3.While-eading

Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Skimming: Ss should ead the mateial fast to find out the main idea/topic sentence fo each paagaph.

Paa 1 ___________________

Paa 2 ___________________

Paa 3 ___________________

…

Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Scanning: Listen to the tape pat by pat to finish ___________________________.

Task 3.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Scanning: Guide Ss to ead the mateial caefully and take some impotant notes, then answe the following questions.

Task 4.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Scanning: Ask Ss to ead the mateial caefully and find out the coect answes to finish the following chat.

Pupose of my design: Enable students to undestand the given mateial bette by using diffeent eading skills.And pope competition can aouse the Ss’ inteest in English leaning.\"Task-based\" teaching method is used hee to develop the Ss’ ability of communication and also thei ability of co-opeation will be well tained.

Step 5.Post-eading

Task 1.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

（接task3）Ask Ss to close books and finish the summay accoding thei notes.

（接task4）etell the stoy /Sum up the paage in Ss’ own wods accoding to the chat.

Task 2.（Individual wok, pai wok, goup wok, cla wok; _____min）

Discu _______________________________________________with othe goup membes and then choose a epote to shae thei opinions about ____________________________________ with the whole cla.

Pupose of my design: I think If the Ss can finish this task well, they will benefit a lot in thei spoken English.Most Ss can take thei pats in the activities, especially fo the Ss who have touble in English study.

Step 5.Homewok

1.__________________________________________________

2.__________________________________________________

Pupose of my design: Homewok is so impotant and neceay fo to maste the knowledge they leaned afte cla.It will check whethe the Ss achieve the teaching aims.

英语全英说课稿

（二）

The leon I am going to talk about is fom the teaching mateialBook One ,Unit 8.the thid pat that is used by the kids in Gade One .

一、Analysis of the teaching mateial （说教材）

This is a dialogue that happens in the fuit shop .seveal sentences suound selling and buying the fuit will be leaned .Duing the fist and the second pat in this unit ,the kids have undestood simple instuctions and act accodingly ,and they can say simple wods ,phases o sentences by looking at objects and the pictues .eg: lychee, banana, apple,\"What’s this ?It’s an apple.\"In Unit seven ,we gasped the numbes fom one to ten .The main language points in this unit is to make sentences using the fuit and numbes feely and communicate with othes in English in the fuit shop.And pay close attention to the single and plual foms of the nouns .Accoding to the kids’ English level and the coesponding content in the daily life ,I give them some exta extending .To tain thei ability of communicate with the othes in English ,I pepae the following design .Teaching aims （教学目标）

1.knowledge and skill aims :（知识技能目标）

eview the names of the ten diffeent kinds of fuit and ecognize the numbes fom one to ten .

Undestand simple instuctions about the numbes and act accodingly.

Pactice English and communicate with othes in the situation.

2.Equip them with the emotion ,attitude and value goals :（情感、态度、价值目标）

Cultivate the spiit of co-opeations in the goup wok

Bing up the good quality of potect and make fiends with the animals .Teaching impotance :（教学重点）

1.Make sentences using the fuit and the numbes .\"Six oanges ,please .’

2.Distinguish the diffeence between the single fom and the plual foms of the nouns .\"one apple / two apples …\"

3.The sentences used when selling and buying the fuit in a fuit shop.

Teaching difficulties :（教学难点）

1.Distinguish the diffeence between the single and the plual foms of the nouns .

2.Tain thei ability of communicating with othes in English .

Teaching aids ;（教具准备）

Multimedia , flash cads ,fesh fuit and aangements and decoations of the fuit shop .

Teaching methods :（教学方法）

Task objective teaching method .TP method , pefomance and games methods .

二、Analysis of the leanes :（说学习者）

We ae facing the 5 to 6-yea-old little kids who just gaduated fom the kindegaten ,and they can not tell the diffeence between kindegaten and the pimay school.sometimes they even don’t know how to behave in the cla.So ,I think the most impotant thing fo me to do is to attact thei inteests and make them love English and feel confident in this subject .so ,I will play some inteesting games with them ,show them the funny catoon movie and ole the plays in the text o have a competation.we should not only focus on the language point itself ,but also set up the eal cicumstance whee I can encouage them to expe themselves bette .What I ty my best to do is to aouse the kids’ inteests and potect thei enthusiasm.三、Analysis of the teaching methods （说教法）

says that duing the Foundation Education peiod ,the total goal fo English leon is to impove the pupils’ ability of compehensive using language .It pomotes task teaching stuctue .Accoding to the little kids’ physical and psychological chaacteistics of keeping cuios ,active and imitating and showing themselves .I adopt the \"task –eseach—constuct \" teaching methods and oganize the cla to focus on the impotance and solve the difficulties .I give the pupils an open and elaxed cicumstance in which they can lean to obseve ,think and discu .duing this pocedue ,the pupils’ ability of thinking and using language is developed vey well .四、Analysis of the teaching pocedues .（说教学过程）

1.Wam up .（歌曲热身）

All the cla sing English song \"Ten little Indian boys \" to aouse thei inteests and help them to step into English leaning cicumstance happily.

2.eview the fuit and the numbes those we leaned in the fist and the second pat in this unit .（复习数字和水果）

A.Watch a funny video .and answe the questions .（lean moe fuit and pactice moe sentence pattens eg: stawbey / watemelon/ pineapple /chey） ask some questions .

What’s this ?

What colou is it ?

How many bananas ae thee ?

Do you like eating bananas ?

What is you favouite fuit ?

Encouage them to open thei mouth and speak English as much as they can .

B.Play gueing game .to eview the spelling of the wods using the basic ponunciation knowledge .

C.Play a game named \"up and down \".emphasis on distinguishing the single and plual foms of the nouns .

3.Guide the pupils to the main teaching points .（引入新课）

To compehensive use the numbes and the fuit that is a needed in a fuit shop .Ask two voluntees to come to the font and choose the ight numbe cads and stick it beside the ight fuit accoding to the othe pupils’ instuctions .The quicke one will be the winne .

Eg: Six oanges ,please .

4.Time to pactice fo all the cla （全体同学操练）。

The pupils choose the ight cads they have pepaed and put them up above thei heads when they hea the teache’s instuctions and give them to the teaching answeing loudly: \"Hee you ae .’

5.Watch a video （观看多媒体，了解本课故事情节）

undestand what’s happening in the stoy ,（This pat is impotant, easonable and effective）and guide them to potect and make fiends with the animals .

Pesent the situation of a fuit shop .the teache will act a shopkeepe and invite a bette pupil to be the custome and finish all the buying steps .

Shopkeepe : Good moning .

Custome : Good moning .

Shopkeepe : Can I help you ?

Custome : Yes ,six oanges ,please .

Shopkeepe : Hee you ae .

Custome : Thank you vey much .

Shopkeepe : You ae welcome .

6.Consolidation and Pactice（巩固和练习）

Goup wok : Divide the cla into eight goups and evey goup will be decoated into a fuit shop, ask one pupil to be the shopkeepe and the othe membes in this goup will be the customes .Encouage them to buy and sell the fuit with what they leaned in this pat ,I design a eal situation that is common in ou daily life and the kids will not feel uncomfotable o unfamilia with it, The teache will go aound the cla and supply the help to the unable ones .In such a peace and pleasant situation they like to speak the dialogue they leaned to expe themselves .They can feel the succe and become confident in speaking English .

7.Conclusion （总结）

The teache would lead the cla to ead the sentences on the boad and ask some moe difficult questions .Maybe the pupils can not undestand them clealy ,but it doesn’t matte .we just give the pupils moe infomation about the language and give them the bette language cicumstances that can help them in the futue leaning .

8.Homewok : （家庭作业）

Encouage the pupils to design a little fuit shop at home and teach thei family the dialogue in the fuit shop .When they pactice this , they should take photos and show the othe pupils the next day .

In this leon , what I design （not only the pesentation of the main teaching points ,but also the activities） attact the pupils inteests .They lean and pactice while playing .I think it’s eally a good leon of high quality.

9.Black design （板书设计）

第12篇：小学英语全英说课稿

小学英语全英说课稿范文——

Good afternoon , Ladies and Gentlemen ! My name is Wu Dan .I come from Yu Hong Primary School .I am very glad to be standing here and talking about Leon 10 ,which is from Fun with English Book 3 Unit 2 .My teaching report includes four parts .Part 1 To analyze the book 1.There are 3 units in Book 3 .This is Leon 10 .The central item is how to master another sentence to expre “ What’s the time ? ” and how to buy something.Using “ What’s the time ? ” hungry , cakes, bread and so on .We’ll study and drill the sentences and the word ’s pronunciation .

2.According to the teaching outline and combining the students ’ situation , I make the teaching aims of this leon as follows .a .The first is the aim of knowledge .It’s to learn and master two sentences.What time is it? I am hungry and then using them to expre the time and go shopping fluently and freely b.The second is the aim of abilities The

creative spirit is quite important to the students.So I will pay much attention to train it in my cla.Otherwise.I will try to train the students listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities, Mainly improve their communicative abilities and encourage them to speak more English.C.The third is the aim of emotion Make the students have succeful feeling and achievement.And make them be in English study.3.Important points The first is to master and use the two sentences.What time is it? I’m hungry.The second is to master the usage of the words hungry, cakes and bread.4.Difficult points.It’s the pronunciation of the two words.hungry, cakes, and how to use them fluently and freely .Part 2 .Teaching and learning methods Make the students take part in cla .Ask and answer in pairs and groups .I’ll use communicative method , discuing method and seeing and hearing method to teach this leon .Part

3 .Teaching aids .In order to interest the students .I’ll use a clock , recorder , cards and some food as my teaching aids .Part 4 .Teaching procedure .Step 1 Revision Before my cla , I’ll get the students to sing an English song to keep themselves relax .Then I’ll use a clock to act it .What’s the time ? What’s the time ? It’s eight o’clock .I’ll show three numbers .When the students answer It’s ten o’clock .I’ll say : It’s ten .Today we’ll learn Leon Ten .Then I\'ll put the clock on the blackboard .Step 2 Presentation and drill First I’ll point to the clock and ask , what time is it ? Students answer It’s ten .Then I go on moving the hands and ask .What time is it ?Students answer quickly .Second I’ll drill the sentences What time is it ? It’s ----- .pairs in pairs or row by row .Third When the students answer It’s 12:00 o’clock .I’ll point to my stomach and say .Oh I’m hungry .and I’ll eat a cake .

Then I’ll go on saying I’m hungry .and I’ll eat another cake .I’ll act it four or five times .Then I ask a student to act it .I’m hungry , too .I’ll say two cakes , please .and the sentences .I’m hungry .Two cakes ,please. Forth :Listen to the dialogue and answer my questions.1.What time is it? 2.How many cakes? Step 3 Consolidation I’ll train the creative spirit of the students.

I’ll give them three please.To act the dialogue freely .First at the 219 Park,second fruit shop Third department store.Step4.Homework Encourage my student to the market to buy something with his friends or parent.小

第13篇：英语说课稿(全英版)

Good morning/evening, everyone.It is my great honor and pleasure to be here sharing my leon with you.

My number is _______, the content of this leon is __________.

I have been ready to finish this leon in 7parts.

(我准备从以下7个方面来完成这次说课内容)

Part 1 analysis of the teaching material

（第1部分分析教材）

The content of this leon unit is talk about words, phrases and patterns, such asThis leon is in the important position of this unit.If the Ss can master it well, it will be helpful for them to learn the rest of this unit.

Part 2 analysis of the Ss

（第2部分分析学情）

They are active,curious and interested in new things.After learning English morn than 2 years, they have some basic English background knowledge, so I should attach the inportance to the communication with Ss, and providing them the chances of using language.

Part 3 teaching aims

（第3部分教学目标分为知识目标，能力目标，情感目标）

1 Aims on the knowledge

By the end of the leon, the Ss will be able to read, recoginze and use these words and phrases, such as patterns, such as 2 Aims on the abilities

By the end of the leon.The Ss can , and get useful information from the listening and reading.

Ss will be able to talk about ’ listening and speaking abilities will be developed.

3 Aims on the emotion

In this leon, the emotional aims is to arouse Ss’ interest of english learning, to foster Ss’consciousne of good-cooperation and proper competition.

To help Ss to recognize and identify the differences between Chinese and English cultures on

Part 4the important and difficult points

（第4部分重点和难点）

The important points is how to help Ss ask and answer the following questions: And how to help Ss be able to listen,speak readDifficult poins are how to help Ss use the important words and patterns correctly

Part 5 teaching methods

（第5部分教学方法）

As we all know, the main teaching aims of learning English in primary school is to cultivate pupil’s basic abilities of listening, speaking and their good sense of their english language.

So in this leon, I will mainly use “Task-based teaching method, communicative language teaching method, and TPR teaching method”

Besides, I will also arrange 4 kinds of activites: they are singing, gueing game, finishing a survey and having a competition.

Part 6 the teaching procedure

（第6部分教学过程。我会从以下5个步骤来完成教学过程。第1步热身和复习，第2步新课呈现，第3步进行练习，第4步巩固提高，第5步复习和作业）Now , I will mainly talk about my teaching procedures.I will follow five steps.Step 1 waring up and revision

It is important to set up a better english learing situation for the pupils.So I will design two acitvities.

Activity 1 sing a song with Ss.

Purpose: the purpose of this step is to form a better english learning surrounding for the Ss, and the same time, it provides situations to review learned knowledge for the next step.

Step 2 presentation

’ interest of the leon.By playing the PPT, I will present the phrases: Purpose :the purpose of this is to present the new words and setences in the situation, which relates to the Ss’ real life experiences, to help the Ss understand the language easily and naturally.

Secondly, play a gueing game.Divide the whole cla into four groups to have a competition.Purpose; the purose of this is to review the key words and phrases one by one.And proper cometiton can arouse the Ss’ interest in english learning.

Thirdly , with the help of the CAI to set a situation to present let Ss understand it easily.Then play the caette, let the Ss listen and imitate the dialogue.Pay attention to their pronunciation and intonation.

Purpose : CAI can provide a real situation for the Ss to understand the dialogue better.And tell the Ss to Step 3 practice

This step includes mechanical activity and activities in the meaningful situation.Mechanical activity is to help Ss to recognize and read the new words and

sentences.

activities in the meaningful situation to make Ss use the new words and sentence structure in a real situation.

Purpose : the purpose of this is to draw the whole Ss’ attention to the spelling of the words.It is to help Ssto consolidate the words and structures through a true situation.Step 4 development

In this step , I will give Ss a free space to show their abilities.

First I will help the Ss finish a survey, and then let them make a new dialogue and act it out.

Task-based teaching method and communicative language teaching method are used here.

Purpose : the purpose of this step is to develop Ss’ability of communication and cooperation.Making a new dialogue is to check if Ss can use the key words, patterns and structures correctly and skillfully.

Step 5 conclusion and homework

After step 4, some pupils can grasp the knowledge well, but some pupils can’t.so revision is important, pupils should speak english after cla as much as they do in cla.It is neceary for the pupils to do some exercise after cla.So I design the following homework.

1 listen and read the content of this unit

(以上就是我教学过程的所有内容)

Part 7 blackboard design

（第7部分板书设计）

A good Bb design can make Ss get key information in limited time.I will make a design like this:

The title of this leon is on the top of the blackboard.Divide the rest of Bb into three parts.The left is for the key words and phrases, the middle is for the main patterns and structures, while the right is for the other unimportant things.

结束语：

That’s all for my teaching design.Thanks a lot for your attention.

第14篇：小学英语全英说课稿

小学英语全英说课稿范文——

Good afternoon , Ladies and Gentlemen !

My name is Wu Dan .I come from Yu Hong Primary School .I am very glad to be

standing here and talking about Leon 10 ,which is from Fun with English Book 3 Unit 2 .My teaching report includes four parts .

Part 1 To analyze the book

1.There are 3 units in Book 3 .This is Leon 10 .The central item is how to master another sentence to expre “ What’s the time ? ” and how to buy something.Using

“ What’s the time ? ” hungry , cakes, bread and so on .We’ll study and drill the sentences and the word ’s pronunciation .

2.According to the teaching outline and combining the students ’ situation , I make the teaching aims of this leon as follows .

a .The first is the aim of knowledge .

It’s to learn and master two sentences.What time is it? I am hungry and then using them to expre the time and go shopping fluently and freely

b.The second is the aim of abilities

Thecreative spirit is quite important to the students.So I will pay much attention to train it in my cla.Otherwise.I will try to train the students listening, speaking, reading and writing abilities, Mainly improve their communicative abilities and encourage them to speak more English.

C.The third is the aim of emotion

Make the students have succeful feeling and achievement.And make them be in English study.

3.Important points

The first is to master and use the two sentences.What time is it? I’m hungry.The second is to master the usage of the words hungry, cakes and bread.

4.Difficult points.

It’s the pronunciation of the two words.hungry, cakes, and how to use them fluently and freely .

Part 2 .Teaching and learning methods

Make the students take part in cla .Ask and answer in pairs and groups .I’ll use

communicative method , discuing method and seeing and hearing method to teach this leon .

Part3 .Teaching aids .

In order to interest the students .I’ll use a clock , recorder , cards and some food as my teaching aids .

Part 4 .Teaching procedure .

Step 1 Revision

Before my cla , I’ll get the students to sing an English song to keep themselves relax .Then I’ll use a clock to act it .What’s the time ? What’s the time ? It’s eight o’clock .I’ll show three numbers .When the students answer It’s ten o’clock .I’ll say : It’s ten .Today we’ll learn Leon Ten .Then I\'ll put the clock on the blackboard .

Step 2 Presentation and drill

First I’ll point to the clock and ask , what time is it ? Students answer It’s ten .Then I go on moving the hands and ask .What time is it ?Students answer quickly .

Second I’ll drill the sentences What time is it ? It’s ----- .pairs in pairs or row by row .

Third When the students answer It’s 12:00 o’clock .I’ll point to my stomach and say .Oh I’m hungry .and I’ll eat a cake .Then I’ll go on saying I’m hungry .and I’ll eat another cake .I’ll act it four or five times .Then I ask a student to act it .I’mhungry , too .I’ll say two cakes , please .and the sentences .I’m hungry .Two cakes ,please.

Forth :Listen to the dialogue and answer my questions.

1.What time is it?

2.How many cakes?

Step 3 Consolidation

I’ll train the creative spirit of the students.

I’ll give them three please.To act the dialogue freely .First at the 219 Park,second fruit shop Third department store.

Step4.Homework

Encourage my student to the market to buy something with his friends or parent.小

第15篇：英语七年级上册Leon 2全英教案

2017-2018学年七年级(初一)英语上册第二讲

Unit 1 Family Leon 1 Photos of Us

Second Period Student: Students of Grade 7 Teaching Content:

1.News words: call, him, run, same, age, as, same...as, sing, dance, live, near, visit 2.International Phonetics. Teaching objectives:

Students will be able to talk about their family members; Students will be able to identify words with the sound /æ/;

Students will be able to read the rhyme without recording.Teaching Methods: The Natural Approach Task-based Teaching Method The Communicative Language Teaching Method Teaching Procedure:

Activity 1: Introduce one of your family members.Say something about him or her, for example, “My mum is 49 years old.She is a cook.” Ask at least 5 students “What about your mum?”

Ask them “How many members are there in your family?” “Who are they?” “What other members do you know?”

Answer the question with, “There are ...in my family.They are...” Do the brainstorm and report in cla. Activity 2.Pronunciation: /æ/

Say “Listen to the rhyme.What sound do you hear the most?” Play the recording the first time, have the students just listen.Go over some words with the sound /æ/, for example, has, at, mat. /æ/发音要领：舌前部稍抬起，舌尖抵下齿。口腔接近全开，上下齿间可容纳食指和中指的宽度，发间时咽喉收缩。

1 .act apple at

2 .sad hat fat bad 3.carry happy family salary

Activity 3.Direct the students to the text on Page 27.Challenge individual students say the words aloud.读句子，注意/æ/的发音。

1 .Is this your handbag? 2. Let the cat out of bag.

3.Jack’s dad has a mad black cat.Catch that mad black cat.

Homework:

1.抄写、背诵本课的单词短语; 2.Exercise 9&10 on P27.

Teaching Reflection: Students are encouraged to talk about their family members.And they made it.They enjoyed the learning proce.

第16篇：详细全英教案Whatwouldyoulike

Teaching Plan for Unit 5 JEFC Book1

What Would You Like? Aims a) Say the names of food in English.

b) Write down the names.

c) Master these sentences: I’m hungry.What would you like? I’d like some……

d) Use these words (food’s names) correctly.

Importance and Difficulties a) New words: hamburger, vegetable, hot dog…… b) Spelling and pronunciation of some words.C) Grammar and Structure: can I have some rice, please? Sure.Here you are.What would you like for dinner? I’d like some ……

Teaching method: “Task-based “Teaching, “Activity-based” Teaching,

“Communicative-based” Teaching.

Teaching aids: Computer, medium, chalk, cards.Teaching Procedures Step1: Review (10mins) a) Warming up: a song: (with medium)

b) Let students imagine what kinds of food do they like and then draw something on the paper.c) Call students to show their ideas (like: oh, I like hamburger……) and present pictures.d) Teacher summarize (you are all good students full of imagination and all did a good job ……) then write the words (hamburger, vegetable, hot dog……) on the board.Step2, Learn the new words and structures (15mins) a) Show the cards to introduce the new words. b) Students reading the new words follow me, and each word twice, then they read them loudly by themselves.C) Learn and analysis the sentence structures: can I have some rice, please? Sure.Here you are.What would you like for dinner? I’d like some ……

Step3: more practice (10mins) a) Reading.Teacher show the cards and then all the students read it loudly.(What would you like? What is this?) b) Do a word game.Teacher show the pictures and then some volunteer read it as soon as poible.(the winner will get the prize) c) Use PPT to show some pictures about food’s names to make students enjoy in it.d) Make a role play.Make a dialogue.Let 3 Ss take part in it (waiter C, dad B and daughter A ).It is in the restaurant. A: Dad, I’m hungry.What for dinner? B: Oh, baby, what would you like? A: I’d like hamburger, rice, fish, vegetables, please. B: Waiter! Waiter! C: What can I do for you, sir? A: We’d like some hamburger, rice, fish, vegetables, please. C: Ok.

A: Thank you, Dad.e) Make sure students pronounce the words and use the sentences correctly.

Homework: Pronounce and spell these words correctly.Write a

paage about “what would you like?” I will check it next cla.

Comments: Filled in as soon as poible after the leon.

第17篇：全英教案My schoolbag

Unit2 My Schoolbag Part B Read and write教案

一、Teaching content Read and write B

二、Teaching aims:

1、To master the letters Oo、Pp、Qq、Rr.

2、To listen and read the words：

Orange，OK，open，pencil-case, squirrel, queue，quiet，rabbit，ruler，rice.

3、To learn the new words: book，ruler，pencil-case.

三、Important points:

1、To master the letters Oo, Pp, Qq, Rr.

2、To listen and say the words :book、ruler、pencil-case.

四、Difficult points:

1、To write the words :book、ruler、pencil-case.

2、The sound of the words “squirrel”、“queue”、“quiet”.

五、Teaching aids.CAI、letter cards、A4paper、courseware

六、Teaching design Step

1、Warm-up （1）Greeting. (2) Sing a song.

Step

2、Review

Play a game.(review A-N)

Step

3、Presentation /practice A: Teach the letters and words.

1、Look at the blackboard and find the same letter.

2、Watch CAI how to write Oo and write on the board.

3、Gueing .(introduce P)

4、Read the words “pen, pencil, pencil-case”

5、Teach how to write“pencil-case”on the blackboard.

6、Introduce another two words about stationery(book, ruler) and write them on the board .

7、As the same way teach “Q and R and words”.

Step

4、Consolidation

1、Let’s chant (Read the words and letters together).

2、Play a game! (Loud or low voice)

Step

5、Homework

Do the homework and enjoy a song

第18篇：详细全英教案Whatwouldyoulike

What Would You Like?说课稿

尊敬的各位评委老师，

大家好，我是李凡

It’s my great honor to be here and share my leon with you.Today i’ll talk about People’s Education Pre The part 3.the topic is about .i will talk about it form

Analysis

the

students.Tcaching procedure.Blackboard design. Well,fristly.Anlaysis of the Teaching material.There are a lot of a picturefor this.The kids will be interested in the book.Besides,the book design a lot of material to improve the student’s ability of listening,speaking,reading and writing.So,i think this book is very good.Aims a) Say the names of food in English. b) Write down the names. c) Master these sentences: I’m hungry.What would you like? I’d like some……

d) Use these words (food’s names) correctly.Importance and Difficulties a) New words: hamburger, vegetable, hot dog…… b) Spelling and pronunciation of some words.C) Grammar and Structure: can I have some rice, please? Sure.Here you are.What would you like for dinner? I’d like some ……

Teaching method: “Task-based “Teaching, “Activity-based” Teaching, “Communicative-based” Teaching.Teaching aids: Computer, medium, chalk, cards.Teaching Procedures Step1: Review (10mins) a) Warming up: a song: (with medium) b) Let students imagine what kinds of food do they like and then draw something on the paper.c) Call students to show their ideas (like: oh, I like hamburger……) and present pictures.d) Teacher summarize (you are all good students full of imagination and all did a good job ……) then write the words (hamburger, vegetable, hot dog……) on the board.Step2, Learn the new words and structures (15mins) a) Show the cards to introduce the new words.b) Students reading the new words follow me, and each word twice, then they read them loudly by themselves.C) Learn and analysis the sentence structures: can I have some rice, please? Sure.Here you are.What would you like for dinner? I’d like some ……

Step3: more practice (10mins) a) Reading.Teacher show the cards and then all the students read it loudly.(What would you like? What is this?) b) Do a word game.Teacher show the pictures and then some volunteer read it as soon as poible.(the winner will get the prize) c) Use PPT to show some pictures about food’s names to make students enjoy in it.d) Make a role play.Make a dialogue.Let 3 Ss take part in it (waiter C, dad B and daughter A ).It is in the restaurant. A: Dad, I’m hungry.What for dinner? B: Oh, baby, what would you like? A: I’d like hamburger, rice, fish, vegetables, please.B: Waiter! Waiter! C: What can I do for you, sir? A: We’d like some hamburger, rice, fish, vegetables, please.C: Ok.A: Thank you, Dad.e) Make sure students pronounce the words and use the sentences correctly.Homework: Pronounce and spell these words correctly.Write a paage about “what would you like?” I will check it next cla.

Comments: Filled in as soon as poible after the leon.Blackboard design: Words: salad 色拉 tea 茶 hanburger汉堡

Sandwich 三明治 hot-dog 热狗 coffee 咖啡

Sentences:-what would you like to drink? -i’d like to some tea.

第19篇：高中英语优质课全英教案

Introduce a Place From Module2 Unit4 Communication Workshop

I.Teaching aims At the end of this leon, students will 1.be very interested in writing an article to introduce a place.2.be able to use suitable person, tense, layout, sentence structures and linking words to introduce a place .3.be proud of our capital Beijing and our hometown Jiaozuo and love them.II.Teaching key points and difficult points 1.Teacher leads students to understand and master the layout, sentence structures and linking words effectively.2.Teacher leads students to master the way to use advanced and various sentence structures.III.Teaching and learning methods Proce-focused writing approach, Group work, Cooperative learning.IV.Teaching procedure 1.Teacher arouses students’ interests by showing some photos of some famous cities in the world, and singing the song, “Welcome to Beijing”.2.Teacher shows the sample article of Beijing to students.This article serves as language input before writing.3.Teacher asks students questions to lead them to understand and master the layout, sentence structures and linking words effectively.e.g.“How many paragraphs are there in the article?”

Answer: (1.Introduction.2.Things to see.3.Things to do.4.Ending words.) “What factors are included in the first paragraph?”

Answer: (General description, Location, Area, Population, History, Climate and Temperature.).“Can you find and circle the beautiful and advanced sentences in the article?”

Answer:

(Location : 1. …is located in …

2.…lies in….

Area: 1.…covers an area of… 2....is the second/ third/...largest city in the world as regards area.etc.)

1 4.Students work in groups and cooperate with each other to answer these questions.5.Teacher introduces the writing task “write an article to introduce Jiaozuo.6.Teacher divides students into groups of six and arouses them to expre the photos of Jiaozuo in best poible ways according to the sentence structures in the article of Beijing.Meanwhile, teacher encourages students to join simple sentences together with linking words, relative pronouns, present participles, etc.to form more advanced and more various sentence structures.7.Students write the first drafts by themselves.8.Teacher stimulates students to check and correct their own drafts; meanwhile, teacher provides the standards of checking and correcting.For example, the content, the layout, the language, the linking words, the handwriting, the tense and person, the grammar and the spelling.9.Teacher divides students into groups of six and arouses them to check and correct their partners’ articles.Teacher provides the standards of checking and correcting again.10.Teacher chooses two typical articles to examine before cla; students learn how to check fully and effectively.10.Teacher help the students to summarize some typical and common mistakes among students’ articles, and correct and analyze them.12.Homework.Polish the first draft and rewrite it.V.After-cla reflection(教后反思）

1.By singing a song to lead in, students are deeply aroused to read the sample article of Beijing, but my singing is not profeional and perfect.2.The article is well designed with many good sentence structures and linking words, students can understand them by answering the questions intended for them, but the time spared for them is too limited, and they can’t fully master and practice them. 3.The time given students to write is 10 minutes, which proves relatively short and limited.I should have given them more time to write the article better.4.The time for students to check is only 3 minutes, which proves to be too short.The checking procedure is very important in writing practice, so teachers should place more emphasis on it. 2

第20篇：小学英语说课稿(全英版)

小学英语说课稿

Hello，My respected judges and dear students, it’s my great honor to stand here to present my leons.My name is **** from*******.

I have been ready to begin my presentation with five parts: There are the analyses of teaching material, teaching aims, the key and difficult points of this leon, teaching methods and teaching procedure.

To begin with: the analysis of teaching material Today I’m going to talk about Part B of Unit 2, PEP Primary English, Book 3.This leon includes two parts: Let’s talk and let’s practice.In section 1, it mainly deals with the dialogue about “What’s in the schoolbag?” and the answers.And in section 2, it provides a real situation for the Ss to practice the pattern.Secondly, Let’s move to the Teaching aims First: Aims on the knowledge According to the new standard of curriculum and syllabus, and after studying the teaching material, the teaching aims are as follows: (1) To enable the Ss to understand and speak the new words & new sentence: such as ******* Make sure that Ss can use these sentences in real situations.(2) To help Ss know the content of this leon, talk about*****and get their own idea about********* Then.Aims on the abilities

(1) To develop Ss’ abilities of listening, speaking, reading and writing.(2) To train the Ss’ ability of working in groups and effective learning strategies.(3) To foster Ss’ abilities of communication and their innovation. Next: Aims on the emotion (1)By completing this task, to increase their interest in English learning and set up confidence in English speaking.Thirdly: It’s the Key-points of this leon Based on the syllabus, the key points are as follows: (1) To help Ss master the new words and sentence.Ask and answer the question: ********* (2) To enable Ss to study in groups and co-operate skillfully and develop their ability in English.The difficult points (1) To help the Ss read the new words in a right pronunciation, .And be able to ask and answer the question, make sure they can use the plural nouns correctly.(2) To finish the******* by themselves.Fourthly, let me introduce my teaching methods As we all know: the main instructional aims of learning English in primary school is to cultivate students basic abilities of listening and speaking and their good sense of the English language.So in this leon

I’ll mainly use the following methods according to the modern social communication teaching theory.“Totally Situational and Task-based language Teaching Approach” will be used in my leon.That is to say, I will let the Ss learn in real situations, finish a task by making a survey to help the Ss to get a better understanding of the key structure of the dialogue.I will arrange four kinds of activities: singing, gueing game, finishing a survey and having a group work with competition.Besides, in this leon ,a recorder, media video, word cards and neceary teaching methods will be used.Lastly, I will introduce my Teaching procedures and purposes of my designing briefly.

I’ll finish this leon in five steps.Step 1.Warm-up and preview 1.Free talk between T and Ss about things in the claroom.2.Sing the song together in accord to build a relaxing study atmosphere. 3.Do some games.The Purpose is that It is important to form a better English learning surrounding for the Ss by singing and doing some total physical response and at the same time it provides situations to review learned knowledge for the next procedure.Step 2.Presentation Now I’ll mainly talk about this step.

1.Present the pattern Help the Ss understand the meaning with the help of my body language.Then lead the Ss to read the sentence.Make sure they can say it correctly.2.Play a gueing game.Divide the whole cla into four groups to have a competition.

Purpose: To present the key structures one by one is much easier for the Ss to learn and grasp the meanings.Proper competition can arouse the Ss’ interest in English learning.3.with the help of the Media player to present the dialogue again.Set a situation to help Ss understand the meaning of the dialogue.4.Play the recorder.Let the Ss listen and imitate the dialogue. Pay attention to their pronunciation and intonation.Step 3.Practice Divide Ss into groups.Practice the conversation, after several Mins, ask three groups give a performance.Find out which group do the best. Purpose: Task-based teaching method is used here to develop Ss’ ability of communication; also their ability of co-operation will be well trained.Step4: Homework Purpose: Homework is so important and neceary for to master the knowledge they learned after cla.It will check whether the Ss achieve the teaching aims.

That is all my presentation of this leon according to the teaching material, teaching aims, key points and difficult points, teaching method and teaching procedure.Thanks for all your time and cooperation.Thank you!

《接力版三年级英语全英教案模板.doc》

将本文的Word文档下载到电脑，方便编辑。

推荐度：

点击下载文档

接力版三年级英语全英教案模板（精选多篇）

推荐第1篇：新版小学三年级下册英语全英教案

推荐第2篇：新版PEP英语三年级上册全英教案unit12

推荐第3篇：一年级快乐英语下册教案(全英)

推荐第4篇：人教版英语六年级下册全英教案

推荐第5篇：pep四年级英语下册全英教案

推荐第6篇：Module14全英教案

推荐第7篇：初中英语全英教案

推荐第8篇：高中英语全英教案

推荐第9篇：接力版三年级上册教案

推荐第10篇：全英英语教师求职信